1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
166 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
177 by the \SpecialChar LyX
182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
184 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
185 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
186 Documentation mailing list:
187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
189 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
211 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
215 \begin_inset Note Note
218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
219 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
220 \begin_inset Newline newline
225 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
233 \begin_layout Standard
234 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
235 LatexCommand tableofcontents
242 \begin_layout Chapter
246 \begin_layout Section
247 What is \SpecialChar LyX
251 \begin_layout Standard
253 is a document preparation system.
254 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
255 scripts, publishable books, business
256 letters and proposals,
257 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
261 It is unlike most other
262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
271 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
287 pt type, left justified, 5
288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
297 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
301 \begin_layout Standard
302 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
307 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
311 \begin_layout Standard
316 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
317 's philosophy: most importantly,
318 the format of all of the manuals.
319 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
320 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
321 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
324 \begin_layout Section
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
331 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
333 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
334 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
338 \begin_layout Standard
339 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
340 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
341 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
343 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
344 only a vertical scrollbar.
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
349 The first case is large images.
350 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
351 the image and use the option
362 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
365 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
368 \begin_layout Standard
369 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
370 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
378 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
385 \begin_layout Section
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
392 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
394 Just select the manual you want to read from the
401 \begin_layout Section
402 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
406 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
413 \begin_layout Standard
414 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
415 can be configured via the menu
417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
421 \begin_inset Index idx
424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
431 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 packages are available.
435 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
437 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
438 was installed on your system,
439 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
444 \begin_inset space \space{}
447 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
448 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
450 To force \SpecialChar LyX
451 to re-inspect your system use
453 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
457 \begin_inset Index idx
460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
461 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
467 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
468 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
471 \begin_layout Section
474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
476 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
483 \begin_layout Standard
484 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
485 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 installed but you will not be
488 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
489 or print your documents
493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
494 Some \SpecialChar LyX
495 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
504 which can produce PDFs and the like.
507 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
512 every \SpecialChar LyX
513 document can still be output as plain text
514 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
520 \begin_layout Standard
521 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
527 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
528 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
531 \begin_layout Standard
532 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
534 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
537 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
545 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
546 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
549 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
553 \begin_inset Index idx
556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
557 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
572 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
576 \begin_layout Chapter
577 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
581 \begin_layout Section
582 Basic File Operations
583 \begin_inset Index idx
586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
595 \begin_layout Standard
600 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
601 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
642 arg "buffer-new-template"
648 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \begin_layout Itemize
678 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
682 \begin_layout Itemize
684 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
696 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
722 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
756 arg "buffer-write-as"
760 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
764 \begin_layout Itemize
766 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
782 \begin_layout Itemize
796 \begin_layout Itemize
810 \begin_layout Standard
811 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
812 few minor differences.
815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
826 command lists the available templates.
827 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
828 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
829 and possibly propose text fragments
831 for the document, features
832 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
835 you would otherwise need to
836 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
838 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
842 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
846 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
854 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
860 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
861 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
865 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
906 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
907 to open a file or create a new one, that big
908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
912 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
916 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
927 \begin_layout Standard
949 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
951 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
954 people work on the same document at the same time.
958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
962 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
967 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
968 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
972 \begin_inset Flex Emph
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
977 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
978 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
987 \begin_inset Flex Emph
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1000 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1011 \begin_inset space ~
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1020 will reload the document from disk.
1021 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1022 and want to restore it to the last save
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1035 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1036 them as your changes.
1039 \begin_layout Section
1040 Basic Editing Features
1041 \begin_inset Index idx
1044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1053 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1060 \begin_layout Standard
1061 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1062 can perform cut and paste operations
1063 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1064 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1065 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1066 editing features and how to access
1068 We will start with cut and paste.
1071 \begin_layout Standard
1072 As you might expect, the
1076 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1077 various other editing features.
1078 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1082 \begin_layout Itemize
1088 \begin_inset Index idx
1091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1120 \begin_layout Itemize
1126 \begin_inset Index idx
1129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1158 \begin_layout Itemize
1164 \begin_inset Index idx
1167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1192 \begin_layout Itemize
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1202 \begin_layout Itemize
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1212 \begin_layout Itemize
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset Index idx
1229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1256 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1266 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1272 \begin_layout Standard
1273 The first three are self-explanatory.
1274 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1275 and other programs using
1296 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1297 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1302 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1303 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1304 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1305 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1306 into individual cells.
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1315 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1316 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1320 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1331 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1346 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1347 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1348 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1354 \begin_inset space \space{}
1357 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1358 text which is often meaningless.)
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1368 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1387 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1388 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1389 is inserted as one paragraph.
1390 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1394 \begin_inset space ~
1399 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1400 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1409 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1423 \begin_inset space ~
1426 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1429 paste from the primary selection.
1430 This is normally the currently selected text.
1433 \begin_layout Standard
1436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1442 \begin_inset space ~
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1460 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1466 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1478 \begin_inset space ~
1483 button to skip the curren
1484 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1495 \begin_inset space ~
1500 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1504 \begin_inset space ~
1509 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1511 If the toggle is set, searching for
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 will not match the word
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 Match whole words only
1540 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1541 to only find complete words, e.
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1575 also offers an advanced
1578 \begin_inset space ~
1582 \begin_inset space ~
1587 feature that is described in section
1588 \begin_inset space ~
1592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1594 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1601 \begin_layout Standard
1602 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1603 \begin_inset space \space{}
1607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1615 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1617 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1622 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1629 \begin_layout Standard
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1637 When the cursor is inside an inset
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 selects the content of the inset.
1647 arg "inset-select-all"
1650 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1651 then to the whole document.
1655 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1658 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1662 \begin_layout Section
1664 \begin_inset Index idx
1667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1674 \begin_inset Index idx
1677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1686 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1693 \begin_layout Standard
1694 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1696 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1702 or the toolbar button
1709 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 or the toolbar button
1721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1728 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1732 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1737 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1738 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1747 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1748 This is a consequence of the 100
1749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1752 step undo limit mentioned above.
1755 \begin_layout Standard
1764 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1766 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1770 \begin_layout Section
1772 \begin_inset Index idx
1775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1784 \begin_layout Standard
1785 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1788 \begin_layout Enumerate
1793 \begin_layout Itemize
1798 once anywhere in the edit window.
1799 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1803 \begin_layout Enumerate
1808 \begin_layout Itemize
1815 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1821 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1822 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1825 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1831 \begin_layout Itemize
1832 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1842 \begin_layout Enumerate
1843 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1847 \begin_layout Standard
1848 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1849 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1853 \begin_layout Section
1855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1857 name "sec:Navigating"
1862 \begin_inset Index idx
1865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1876 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1884 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1885 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1888 \begin_layout Itemize
1889 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1891 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 or by the toolbar button
1901 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1907 \begin_layout Itemize
1908 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1910 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1913 and use the same menu to return to them.
1914 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1917 \begin_layout Standard
1921 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1926 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1927 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1934 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1935 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1936 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1937 last editing position.
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1945 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1949 \begin_layout Subsection
1951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1953 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Outline
1968 \begin_inset Index idx
1971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1982 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1983 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1984 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1990 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1994 ), notes, or citations (see section
1995 \begin_inset space ~
1999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2001 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2006 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2012 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2013 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2014 dialog and to modify the citation.
2017 \begin_layout Standard
2022 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2023 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2025 Labels and References
2027 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2036 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2039 \begin_layout Standard
2040 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2041 control the display.
2046 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2047 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2052 option keeps it in the current view state.
2053 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2057 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2058 \begin_inset space ~
2061 3, the subsections of sections
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2065 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2070 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2075 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2085 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2088 \begin_layout Standard
2095 button refreshes the TOC (
2096 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2098 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2102 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2104 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2108 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2112 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2116 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2120 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2122 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2126 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2128 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2132 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2134 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2138 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2142 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2144 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2148 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2152 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2156 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2160 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2164 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2168 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2172 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2176 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2178 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2182 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2196 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2197 For example, you can move section
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2205 2.4 or after section
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2224 (or the corresponding key bindings
2232 ) you can change the level of sections.
2233 You can make section
2234 \begin_inset space ~
2238 \begin_inset space ~
2242 \begin_inset space ~
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2249 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2250 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2253 \begin_layout Subsection
2254 Horizontal Scrolling
2255 \begin_inset Index idx
2258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2259 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2267 \begin_layout Standard
2269 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2271 \begin_inset space ~
2274 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2275 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2276 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2281 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2285 \begin_layout Itemize
2287 is used on a small tablet computer
2290 \begin_layout Itemize
2291 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2303 \begin_inset space ~
2316 \begin_layout Itemize
2317 Math constructs with long command names
2320 \begin_layout Standard
2321 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2322 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2324 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2325 window so that table
2326 \begin_inset space ~
2330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2332 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2337 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2339 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2340 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2343 \begin_layout Standard
2344 \begin_inset Float table
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2357 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2361 Horizontal scrolling test.
2369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2371 \begin_inset Tabular
2372 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2373 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 \begin_layout Section
2419 Input/Word Completion
2420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2422 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2427 \begin_inset Index idx
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2437 \begin_inset Index idx
2440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2471 \begin_layout Standard
2473 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2475 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2476 is used to propose completions.
2479 \begin_layout Standard
2480 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2488 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 \begin_inset space ~
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2508 \begin_inset space ~
2513 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2514 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2518 \begin_inset space ~
2524 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2525 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2526 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2527 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2530 \begin_layout Standard
2532 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2533 completions available.
2538 key to accept a proposed completion.
2539 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2540 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2541 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2544 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2551 \begin_layout Standard
2552 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2553 ing options for text.
2555 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2557 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2559 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2562 he special math option
2566 enables characters to be composed.
2568 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2570 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2574 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2577 you want to insert the character
2578 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2582 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2585 input the characters
2586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2598 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2600 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2604 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2606 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2611 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2613 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2616 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2619 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2621 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2624 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2629 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2635 's installation folder.
2637 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2638 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2645 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2650 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2651 In the example above,
2656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_layout Section
2690 \begin_inset Index idx
2693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2700 \begin_inset Index idx
2703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2732 \begin_inset Index idx
2735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2766 \begin_layout Standard
2767 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2781 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2784 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2788 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2789 \begin_inset space ~
2793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2795 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2802 \begin_layout Standard
2806 \begin_inset space ~
2814 \begin_inset space ~
2835 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2839 \begin_layout Labeling
2840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2844 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2845 LatexCommand nomenclature
2847 description "Tabulator key"
2854 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2856 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2857 \begin_inset space ~
2861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2863 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2870 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2874 , especially section
2875 \begin_inset space ~
2879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2881 reference "subsec:Lists"
2887 If you are still confused, look in the
2892 \begin_inset Newline newline
2900 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2901 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2905 \begin_layout Labeling
2906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2910 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2911 LatexCommand nomenclature
2913 description "Escape key"
2921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2928 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2929 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2932 \begin_layout Labeling
2933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2938 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2939 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 There are three modifier keys:
2947 \begin_layout Labeling
2948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2966 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2967 LatexCommand nomenclature
2969 description "Control key"
2974 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2975 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2979 \begin_layout Itemize
2988 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2991 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3012 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3016 \begin_layout Labeling
3017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3035 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3036 LatexCommand nomenclature
3038 description "Shift key"
3043 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3044 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3047 \begin_layout Labeling
3048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3067 LatexCommand nomenclature
3069 description "Alt or Meta key"
3074 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3075 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3076 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3082 \begin_inset Newline newline
3085 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3087 menu accelerator keys
3090 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3091 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3095 \begin_layout Standard
3096 For example, the sequence
3097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3103 \begin_inset space ~
3107 \begin_inset space ~
3113 \begin_inset space ~
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3140 \begin_inset space ~
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3161 manual lists all other things bound to the
3169 \begin_layout Standard
3170 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3172 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3174 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3175 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3177 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3178 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3179 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3181 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3197 followed by a capital
3204 \begin_layout Chapter
3207 \begin_inset Index idx
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3220 \begin_layout Section
3222 \begin_inset Index idx
3225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3234 \begin_layout Subsection
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3239 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3240 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3241 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3242 numbering schemes, and so on.
3243 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3244 and format the title of your document differently.
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3252 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3253 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3254 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3255 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3256 picks one for you by default.
3257 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3260 \begin_layout Subsection
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3274 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3281 \begin_layout Standard
3282 You can select a class using the
3284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3285 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3289 \begin_inset Index idx
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3307 \begin_layout Standard
3308 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3313 \begin_layout Description
3314 Article for basic articles
3317 \begin_layout Description
3318 Report for basic reports
3321 \begin_layout Description
3322 Book for writing a book
3325 \begin_layout Description
3326 Letter for US-style letters
3329 \begin_layout Standard
3330 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3331 only uses if you have installed
3332 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3334 distributions will include
3336 Here are some of the classes.
3337 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3339 Special Document Classes
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3352 \begin_layout Description
3353 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3357 \begin_layout Description
3358 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3362 \begin_layout Description
3363 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3364 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3365 There are three article layouts available.
3366 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3367 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3368 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3369 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 sequential numbering
3375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3378 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3379 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3380 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3381 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3384 \begin_layout Description
3385 Beamer Layout for presentations
3388 \begin_layout Description
3389 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3390 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3391 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3392 with \SpecialChar LyX
3396 \begin_layout Description
3397 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3400 \begin_layout Description
3402 \begin_inset space ~
3405 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3408 \begin_layout Description
3409 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3412 \begin_layout Description
3413 Foils Used to make transparencies
3416 \begin_layout Description
3417 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3418 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3419 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3420 with \SpecialChar LyX
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3426 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3429 \begin_layout Description
3430 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3433 \begin_layout Description
3434 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3437 \begin_layout Description
3438 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3439 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3440 (Is used by this document.)
3443 \begin_layout Description
3444 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3447 \begin_layout Description
3448 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3451 \begin_layout Description
3456 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3457 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3459 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3463 \begin_layout Description
3464 Slides Used to make transparencies
3467 \begin_layout Description
3469 \begin_inset space ~
3472 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3473 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3476 \begin_layout Description
3477 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3480 \begin_layout Standard
3481 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3483 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3485 Special Document Classes
3492 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3493 of the document classes.
3496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3501 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3506 \begin_inset Index idx
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3526 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3527 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3529 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3532 \begin_layout Standard
3535 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3540 , are highly specialized.
3542 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3543 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3544 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3545 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3546 by some document class.
3547 There are just too many of them.
3548 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3551 \begin_layout Standard
3552 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3560 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3561 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3562 document class for a new file.
3564 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3567 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3574 manual for information on how to install them.
3575 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3581 \begin_layout Standard
3582 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3583 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3584 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3585 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3586 class files to be used for dissertation
3587 s submitted to those universities.
3588 The \SpecialChar LyX
3589 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3591 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3595 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3601 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3608 name "subsec:Modules"
3613 \begin_inset Index idx
3616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 \begin_layout Standard
3626 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3627 chosen document class.
3628 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3629 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3640 \begin_inset Index idx
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3650 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3654 \begin_layout Standard
3655 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 packages or file format converters that are not always
3657 installed by default.
3659 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3660 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3661 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3662 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3664 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3665 file without the missing prerequisites.
3666 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3667 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3670 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3674 \begin_inset Index idx
3677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3685 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3689 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3702 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3704 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3715 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3718 \begin_layout Standard
3719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3727 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3729 will advise you about these things.
3737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3741 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3746 \begin_inset Index idx
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 Document ! Local Layout
3758 \begin_layout Standard
3759 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3760 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3761 : They are intended to be used in
3762 a variety of different documents.
3763 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3764 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3765 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3766 need a specific inset or
3767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3769 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3772 style only that one time.
3773 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3775 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3793 manual for information on how to use it.
3796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3800 \begin_layout Standard
3801 Each class has a default set of options.
3802 Here's a quick table describing them:
3805 \begin_layout Standard
3806 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3812 \begin_layout Standard
3814 \begin_inset Tabular
3815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3816 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 You're probably also wondering what
4284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4288 \begin_inset space ~
4292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4296 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4297 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4302 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4307 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4317 headings, there are also
4325 headings, and so on.
4326 We will describe these headings fully in section
4327 \begin_inset space ~
4331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4333 reference "subsec:Headings"
4340 \begin_layout Subsection
4342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4344 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4349 \begin_inset Index idx
4352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 \begin_inset Index idx
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4371 \begin_layout Standard
4372 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4381 \begin_inset space ~
4389 \begin_inset space ~
4394 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4396 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4397 doesn't support special options you want to
4398 use for your document.
4399 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4400 -class and its options, you have to read
4404 \begin_layout Standard
4406 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4410 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4414 \begin_inset space ~
4421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 \begin_inset space ~
4432 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4433 You can choose between the following five options:
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 Use default page style of current class.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4451 No page numbers or headings.
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4463 \begin_layout Labeling
4464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4469 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4470 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4471 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4472 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4475 \begin_layout Labeling
4476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4481 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4482 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4488 \begin_inset Index idx
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4499 How they are defined is explained in section
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4506 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4515 \begin_inset space ~
4519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4521 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4528 \begin_layout Subsection
4529 Paper Size and Orientation
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4534 Document ! Paper size
4540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4542 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4549 \begin_layout Standard
4550 You can find the following options in the menu
4553 \begin_inset space ~
4560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4564 \begin_inset Index idx
4567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4576 \begin_layout Labeling
4577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 What size paper to print on.
4591 \begin_layout Itemize
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 US letter, US legal, US executive
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Labeling
4635 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4640 To choose whether to output as
4651 \begin_layout Labeling
4652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4656 \begin_inset space ~
4661 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4662 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4665 \begin_layout Subsection
4667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4669 name "subsec:Margins"
4674 \begin_inset Index idx
4677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4684 \begin_inset Index idx
4687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4696 \begin_layout Standard
4697 Paper margins are set in the menu
4699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4703 \begin_inset Index idx
4706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4715 \begin_layout Standard
4716 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4717 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4718 the paper format and the font size into account.
4721 \begin_layout Subsection
4725 \begin_layout Standard
4726 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4727 has to convert everything into the new
4729 That includes the paragraph environments.
4730 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4731 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4732 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4734 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4743 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4745 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4746 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4747 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4750 \begin_layout Section
4751 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4752 \begin_inset Index idx
4755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4756 Paragraph ! Indentation
4764 \begin_layout Subsection
4766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4768 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4776 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4777 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4780 \begin_layout Standard
4781 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4782 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4783 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4784 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4788 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4794 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4795 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4796 language than English.
4798 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4802 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4803 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4804 into \SpecialChar LyX
4806 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4809 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4811 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4812 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4813 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4821 goes to produce a printable file.
4826 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4828 gives you the ability globally to change
4832 these pre-coded spacings.
4833 We will explain more later.
4836 \begin_layout Subsection
4837 Paragraph Separation
4838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4840 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4845 \begin_inset Index idx
4848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 Paragraph ! Separation
4857 \begin_layout Standard
4865 \begin_inset space ~
4873 \begin_inset space ~
4880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4884 \begin_inset Index idx
4887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4893 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4896 \begin_layout Subsection
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4901 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4906 \begin_inset space ~
4911 dialog and toggle the
4914 \begin_inset space ~
4919 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4922 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4926 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4927 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4932 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4933 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4936 \begin_layout Subsection
4938 \begin_inset Index idx
4941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4957 \begin_inset Index idx
4960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4969 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4973 \begin_inset space ~
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4999 installed to use this feature.
5004 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5008 \begin_inset space ~
5013 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5014 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5017 \begin_layout Section
5018 Paragraph Environments
5019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5021 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5026 \begin_inset Index idx
5029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 Paragraph ! Environments
5036 \begin_inset Index idx
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5040 Paragraph environments|(
5048 \begin_layout Subsection
5052 \begin_layout Standard
5053 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5056 \begin_layout Standard
5065 } \SpecialChar ldots
5075 \begin_inset Newline newline
5078 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5080 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5081 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5082 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5091 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5095 A paragraph environment is simply a
5096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5103 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5104 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5105 scheme, labels, and so on.
5106 Additionally, you can
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5114 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5115 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5116 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5117 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5119 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5121 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5126 \begin_inset Graphics
5127 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5133 at the left end of the toolbar.
5135 will change the environment of the
5139 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5140 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5141 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5153 create a new paragraph using the
5157 paragraph environment.
5159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5166 because if you are in one of these environments:
5169 \begin_layout Itemize
5175 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 \begin_layout Itemize
5187 \begin_layout Itemize
5193 \begin_layout Itemize
5199 \begin_layout Itemize
5205 \begin_layout Itemize
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5217 , rather than resetting it to
5222 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5223 \begin_inset space ~
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5229 reference "sec:Nesting"
5236 \begin_layout Subsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The default paragraph environment is
5246 It creates a plain paragraph.
5248 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5249 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5250 this manual) are in the
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 You can nest a paragraph using the
5262 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5270 \begin_layout Subsection
5272 \begin_inset Index idx
5275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5285 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5286 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5295 for thanks or contact information.
5296 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5297 places all of this on a separate page
5298 along with today's date.
5299 For other types of documents, the title
5300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5307 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5310 \begin_layout Standard
5312 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5326 Here's how you use them:
5329 \begin_layout Itemize
5330 Put the title of your document in the
5337 \begin_layout Itemize
5338 Put the author name in the
5345 \begin_layout Itemize
5346 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5347 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5353 Note that using this environment is optional.
5354 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5355 will automatically insert today's date.
5356 If you don't want a date, use the option
5358 Suppress default date on front page
5362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5365 \begin_inset space ~
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 You can use footnotes to insert
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5382 or contact information.
5385 \begin_layout Subsection
5387 \begin_inset Index idx
5390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5399 name "subsec:Headings"
5406 \begin_layout Standard
5407 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5409 takes care of the numbering for you.
5412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5414 \begin_inset Index idx
5417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5418 Section headings ! Numbered
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5427 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5431 \begin_layout Enumerate
5437 \begin_layout Enumerate
5443 \begin_layout Enumerate
5449 \begin_layout Enumerate
5455 \begin_layout Enumerate
5461 \begin_layout Enumerate
5467 \begin_layout Enumerate
5473 \begin_layout Standard
5475 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5476 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5477 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5478 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5480 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5482 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5488 \begin_layout Standard
5489 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5490 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5491 You group the book into chapters.
5493 does a similar grouping:
5496 \begin_layout Itemize
5501 is divided into either
5512 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Itemize
5536 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 \begin_layout Itemize
5572 \begin_layout Standard
5573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5581 Not all document types use the
5585 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5590 is the top-level heading.
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5603 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5604 labels it with its number,
5605 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5607 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5621 \begin_inset Index idx
5624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5634 The unnumbered section headings have a
5635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5642 at the end of their name.
5643 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5644 the table of contents, see section
5645 \begin_inset space ~
5649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5658 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5659 Changing the Numbering
5660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5662 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5669 \begin_layout Standard
5670 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5671 in the Table of Contents.
5672 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5674 Just as certain classes start with
5688 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5698 This is something you can change.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5708 \begin_inset Index idx
5711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5720 \begin_inset space ~
5724 \begin_inset space ~
5729 you will see two counters.
5734 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5735 numbers a section heading.
5736 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5741 Short Titles of Headings
5742 \begin_inset Index idx
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5746 Section headings ! Short titles
5752 \begin_inset Argument 1
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5764 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5771 \begin_layout Standard
5772 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5773 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5774 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5775 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5778 \begin_layout Standard
5780 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5781 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5782 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5783 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5794 This will insert a box labeled
5795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5799 \begin_inset space ~
5803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5806 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5807 This also works for captions inside floats.
5808 There can only be one short title per title.
5811 \begin_layout Standard
5812 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5819 \begin_layout Standard
5820 The following information applies to all section headings:
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5827 \begin_layout Itemize
5828 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5839 \begin_layout Subsection
5843 \begin_layout Standard
5845 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5859 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5860 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5861 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5862 the text they contain.
5863 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5871 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5875 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5884 when you start a new paragraph.
5885 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5889 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5890 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5891 have to change back to the
5895 environment yourself.
5898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5907 \begin_inset Index idx
5910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5921 time for the differences.
5930 are identical except for one difference:
5934 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5943 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5947 Here's an example of the
5960 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5962 See – no indentation!
5966 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5967 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5968 the other paragraph.
5971 \begin_layout Standard
5972 Here's another example, this time in the
5979 \begin_layout Quotation
5985 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5986 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5987 the first line, then
5991 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5995 you were quoting other text.
5998 \begin_layout Quotation
5999 Here's a new paragraph.
6000 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6001 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6004 \begin_layout Standard
6005 As the examples show,
6009 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6010 They should put quotes in the
6015 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6019 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6024 \begin_inset Index idx
6027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6034 \begin_inset Index idx
6037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6053 \begin_layout Standard
6058 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6064 \begin_inset Newline newline
6067 Which I did not rehearse!
6071 It could be much worse.
6072 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6074 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6075 indented a bit more than the first.
6076 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6082 \begin_inset Newline newline
6085 And make things look fine
6086 \begin_inset Newline newline
6092 arg "newline-insert newline"
6098 \begin_layout Standard
6103 does not indent both margins.
6104 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6105 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6108 arg "newline-insert newline"
6114 \begin_layout Subsection
6116 \begin_inset Index idx
6119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6137 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6147 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6148 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6157 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6158 lets you provide your own label.
6159 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6160 describing some general features of all four of them.
6163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6170 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6171 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6180 reset the environment to
6184 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6185 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6186 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6190 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6194 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6203 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6204 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6206 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6207 you read all of section
6208 \begin_inset space ~
6212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6214 reference "sec:Nesting"
6221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6223 \begin_inset Index idx
6226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6242 \begin_layout Standard
6243 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6247 paragraph environment.
6248 It has the following properties:
6251 \begin_layout Itemize
6252 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6256 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6261 \begin_layout Itemize
6262 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6266 \begin_layout Itemize
6267 The items can have any length.
6269 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6270 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6277 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 environment inside another
6286 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6291 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6294 \begin_layout Itemize
6296 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6299 \begin_layout Itemize
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6307 reference "sec:Nesting"
6311 for a full explanation of nesting.
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6325 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6328 \begin_layout Standard
6329 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6330 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the first level
6338 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6342 \begin_layout Itemize
6343 The label for the second level is a dash.
6347 \begin_layout Itemize
6348 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6352 \begin_layout Itemize
6353 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Back out to the third level.
6362 \begin_layout Itemize
6363 Back to the second level.
6367 \begin_layout Itemize
6368 Back to the outermost level.
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6372 These are the default labels for an
6377 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6382 dialog in the submenu
6387 \begin_inset Index idx
6390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6396 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6400 \begin_layout Standard
6401 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6402 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6404 \begin_inset space ~
6408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6410 reference "sec:Nesting"
6417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6419 \begin_inset Index idx
6422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6431 name "sec:Enumerate"
6438 \begin_layout Standard
6443 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6444 It has these properties:
6447 \begin_layout Enumerate
6448 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6452 \begin_layout Enumerate
6453 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6457 \begin_layout Enumerate
6459 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6462 \begin_layout Enumerate
6467 environment resets the counter to one.
6470 \begin_layout Enumerate
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6485 Items can have any length.
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6489 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6492 \begin_layout Enumerate
6493 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6496 \begin_layout Enumerate
6497 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6501 \begin_layout Standard
6510 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6512 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6513 labels the four different levels in an
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The first level of an
6525 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6529 \begin_layout Enumerate
6530 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6539 \begin_layout Enumerate
6540 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6543 \begin_layout Enumerate
6544 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6549 \begin_layout Enumerate
6550 Back to the third level
6554 \begin_layout Enumerate
6555 Back to the second level.
6559 \begin_layout Enumerate
6560 Back to the outermost level.
6563 \begin_layout Standard
6564 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6568 environment, see section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6580 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6584 \begin_layout Standard
6585 There is more to nesting
6589 environments than we've stated here.
6590 You should read section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "sec:Nesting"
6601 to learn more about nesting.
6604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6606 \begin_inset Index idx
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6619 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6623 list has no fixed label.
6624 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6633 of the first line as the label.
6637 \begin_layout Description
6638 Example: This is an example of the
6645 \begin_layout Standard
6647 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6651 \begin_layout Standard
6653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6660 it is meant that the first usage of the
6664 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6666 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6674 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6682 \begin_inset space ~
6688 \begin_inset space ~
6692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6694 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6698 for more information.) Here is an example:
6701 \begin_layout Description
6703 \begin_inset space ~
6706 Example: This one shows how to use a
6709 \begin_inset space ~
6721 \begin_layout Description
6722 Usage: You should use the
6726 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6727 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6729 It's not a good idea to use a
6733 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6734 You're better off using
6746 paragraphs into them.
6749 \begin_layout Description
6750 Nesting: You can nest
6754 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6758 \begin_layout Standard
6759 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6760 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6761 them from the first line.
6764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6766 \begin_inset Index idx
6769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_layout Standard
6783 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6784 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6788 \begin_layout Standard
6797 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6799 Here are its properties:
6802 \begin_layout Labeling
6803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6805 \begin_inset space ~
6808 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6817 of each line as the item label.
6822 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6823 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6824 space as described above.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6829 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6830 uses different margins for the item label and the
6831 body of the item text.
6832 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6833 label width plus a little extra space.
6836 \begin_layout Labeling
6837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6839 \begin_inset space ~
6842 width \SpecialChar LyX
6843 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6844 If the label width is larger, the label
6845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6852 into the first line.
6853 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6854 margin of the rest of the item text.
6857 \begin_layout Labeling
6858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6860 \begin_inset space ~
6863 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6868 environment has the same left margin.
6869 \begin_inset Newline newline
6872 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6877 \begin_inset space ~
6882 dialog (toolbar button
6885 arg "layout-paragraph"
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6897 determines the default label width.
6898 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6907 multiple times instead.
6908 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6918 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6926 every time you alter a label in a
6931 \begin_inset Newline newline
6934 The predefined default width is the length of
6935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6943 \begin_inset space ~
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6954 list the same way as the
6958 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6964 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6973 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6974 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6976 \begin_inset space ~
6980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6982 reference "sec:Nesting"
6986 to learn about nesting.
6989 \begin_layout Standard
6990 There is yet another feature of the
6994 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6995 left-justifies the item labels by
6997 You can use additional
7001 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7002 justifies the item label.
7007 are documented in section
7008 \begin_inset space ~
7012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7014 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7019 Here are some examples:
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 Left The default for
7031 \begin_layout Labeling
7032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7033 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7043 \begin_layout Labeling
7044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7045 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7049 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7056 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7059 \begin_layout Subsection
7061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7063 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7068 \begin_inset Index idx
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 The features described in this section require that the module
7083 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7085 is loaded in the document settings.
7086 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7092 \begin_inset Index idx
7095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7106 Custom Enumerate Lists
7107 \begin_inset Index idx
7110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7121 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7127 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7128 There you add the command
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7153 Code, look at section
7154 \begin_inset space ~
7158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7160 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7173 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7180 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7181 For capital Roman numerals replace
7193 in the command above.
7194 For Arabic numerals use
7202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7209 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7224 \begin_layout Standard
7226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 You can only number 26
7235 \begin_inset space ~
7238 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7246 \begin_layout Standard
7247 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7248 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7251 \begin_layout Standard
7252 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7255 \begin_layout Enumerate
7256 \begin_inset Argument 1
7259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7285 \begin_layout Enumerate
7286 \begin_inset Argument 1
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_layout Enumerate
7318 \begin_inset Argument 1
7321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7345 \begin_layout Enumerate
7346 \begin_inset Argument 1
7349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7376 For this list these commands were used:
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7390 \begin_inset Newline newline
7398 \begin_inset Newline newline
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7423 makes the label emphasized and
7432 \begin_layout Standard
7433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7442 lists until you change the definition.
7450 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7456 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7465 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7468 \begin_layout Enumerate
7469 \begin_inset Argument 1
7472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7491 \begin_inset Note Note
7494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7495 goes back to default numbering
7503 \begin_layout Enumerate
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7511 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7521 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7522 to indicate that it is a resumed
7523 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7524 , but in the output.
7527 \begin_layout Standard
7528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7546 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7548 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7549 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7550 of a normal enumeration.
7551 There, insert the command
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_layout Standard
7565 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7569 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_layout Enumerate
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7578 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7581 \begin_layout Enumerate
7582 \begin_inset Argument 1
7585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 This enumeration starts at 4
7604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7606 \begin_inset Index idx
7609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7621 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7624 \begin_layout Itemize
7628 \begin_layout Itemize
7629 with standard spacing
7632 \begin_layout Standard
7633 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7635 Add there the command
7639 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7642 \begin_layout Itemize
7643 \begin_inset Argument 1
7646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7665 \begin_layout Itemize
7669 \begin_layout Itemize
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7681 \begin_inset Index idx
7684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7692 For more information see its documentation,
7693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7703 \begin_layout Standard
7704 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7706 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7707 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7711 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7714 \begin_layout Enumerate
7715 \begin_inset Argument 1
7718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7726 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7739 \begin_layout Enumerate
7740 with negative indentation
7743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7744 Further Customization
7745 \begin_inset Index idx
7748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7749 Lists ! Customization
7757 \begin_layout Standard
7758 You can also change the style of description lists.
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 changes the description label font, the command
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 sets the list style.
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7783 An example where the command
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7791 itshape, style=nextline
7794 \begin_layout Standard
7798 \begin_layout Description
7800 \begin_inset space ~
7804 \begin_inset Argument 1
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7815 itshape, style=nextline
7825 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7826 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7830 \begin_layout Description
7832 \begin_inset space ~
7835 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7836 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7837 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7847 \begin_inset Index idx
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 For more information see its documentation
7859 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7869 \begin_layout Subsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7885 \begin_inset space ~
7888 Address: An Overview
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7893 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7901 \begin_inset space ~
7907 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7908 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7909 gags on the document.
7910 In contrast, you can use the
7917 \begin_inset space ~
7922 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7923 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7928 Of course, you're not limited to using
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7944 \begin_inset space ~
7949 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7950 some European academic papers.
7953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7957 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7964 \begin_layout Standard
7969 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7970 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7974 \begin_inset space ~
7979 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7980 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7981 Here's an example of each:
7984 \begin_layout Right Address
7986 \begin_inset Newline newline
7990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7994 \begin_inset Newline newline
7997 When is it? What is today?
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8004 \begin_inset space ~
8010 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8012 the largest block of text on a single line.
8013 Here's an example of the
8020 \begin_layout Address
8022 \begin_inset Newline newline
8025 Where do I send this
8026 \begin_inset Newline newline
8029 Your post office and country
8032 \begin_layout Standard
8033 As you can see, both
8040 \begin_inset space ~
8045 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8050 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8051 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8057 This makes sense, since
8065 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8066 Thus, you have to use
8073 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8085 \begin_inset space ~
8090 ) to start a new line in an
8097 \begin_inset space ~
8105 \begin_layout Subsection
8109 \begin_layout Standard
8110 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8111 or list of references.
8113 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8118 \begin_inset Index idx
8121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8130 \begin_layout Standard
8135 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8136 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8137 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8138 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8142 in anything else or vice versa.
8148 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8149 The book document classes ignores the
8153 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8157 in a letter document class.
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8165 environment does several things for you.
8166 First, it puts the centered label
8167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8175 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8177 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8178 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8179 the subsequent text.
8180 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8182 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8187 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8191 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8192 The new paragraph will still be in the
8197 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8198 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8201 \begin_layout Standard
8202 \begin_inset Float figure
8209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Graphics
8212 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8225 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 We would love to demonstrate the
8251 environment, but since this document is in the
8252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 class, we can't do this.
8260 We inserted it therefore as figure
8261 \begin_inset space ~
8265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8267 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8272 If you have never heard of an
8273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8280 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8285 \begin_inset Index idx
8288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8297 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8309 environment is used to list references.
8310 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8311 only use it at the end of the document.
8323 \begin_layout Standard
8324 When you first open a
8328 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8329 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8345 depending on the document class.
8346 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8347 Each paragraph of the
8351 environment is a bibliography entry.
8356 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8357 Each new paragraph is still in the
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8365 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8366 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8368 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8370 handling, have a look at section
8371 \begin_inset space ~
8375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8377 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8384 \begin_layout Subsection
8385 Special Environments
8388 \begin_layout Standard
8390 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8391 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8412 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8425 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8427 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8432 key as a fixed whitespace.
8436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8449 \begin_inset space ~
8454 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8472 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8475 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8478 arg "newline-insert newline"
8495 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8496 So, when you finish using the
8501 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8502 Also, you can nest the
8507 environment inside of others.
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8511 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8514 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 arg "newline-insert newline"
8521 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8526 \begin_inset space \space{}
8536 arg "newline-insert newline"
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 arg "newline-insert newline"
8556 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8564 You must put at least one
8568 in any line you want blank.
8569 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8578 since that will insert
8583 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8586 arg "self-insert \""
8592 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8600 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8608 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8612 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 printf("Hello World!
8618 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8622 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8626 \begin_layout Standard
8627 This is just the standard
8628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8638 \begin_layout Standard
8644 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8646 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8647 as if you used a typewriter.
8648 \begin_inset Index idx
8651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8652 Paragraph environments|)
8657 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8660 Program Code Listings
8665 \begin_inset space ~
8673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8677 \begin_inset Index idx
8680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8694 environment is similar to the
8699 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8700 computer console text.
8705 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8719 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8720 you can have empty lines.
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 have a certain language and a text style
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8739 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8740 and \SpecialChar TeX
8744 \begin_layout Standard
8745 Because of these properties
8749 works like a typewriter.
8753 \begin_layout Verbatim
8758 \begin_layout Verbatim
8762 The following 2 lines are empty:
8765 \begin_layout Verbatim
8769 \begin_layout Verbatim
8773 \begin_layout Verbatim
8775 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8785 environment is identical to
8789 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8790 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8797 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8802 \begin_layout Section
8803 Nesting Environments
8804 \begin_inset Index idx
8807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8808 Nesting ! Environments
8814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8823 \begin_layout Subsection
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8829 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8831 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8833 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8835 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 \begin_layout Enumerate
8865 \begin_layout Enumerate
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8871 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8873 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8875 \begin_inset space ~
8879 \begin_inset space ~
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8891 \begin_inset space ~
8896 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8898 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8901 arg "depth-increment"
8907 arg "depth-decrement"
8921 arg "depth-increment"
8927 arg "depth-decrement"
8931 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8932 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8936 \begin_layout Standard
8937 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8938 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8939 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8940 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8941 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8944 \begin_layout Standard
8945 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8947 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8949 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8952 \begin_layout Subsection
8953 What You Can and Can't Nest
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8958 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8963 than a simple yes or no.
8964 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8967 \begin_layout Itemize
8968 Completely unnestable
8971 \begin_layout Itemize
8972 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8976 \begin_layout Itemize
8977 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8983 environments have them:
8986 \begin_layout Description
8987 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8988 Can't nest into them.
8992 \begin_layout Itemize
8998 \begin_layout Itemize
9004 \begin_layout Itemize
9010 \begin_layout Itemize
9016 \begin_layout Itemize
9023 \begin_layout Description
9025 \begin_inset space ~
9028 Nestable You can nest them.
9029 You can nest other things into them.
9033 \begin_layout Itemize
9039 \begin_layout Itemize
9045 \begin_layout Itemize
9051 \begin_layout Itemize
9057 \begin_layout Itemize
9063 \begin_layout Itemize
9069 \begin_layout Itemize
9075 \begin_layout Itemize
9082 \begin_layout Itemize
9088 \begin_layout Itemize
9095 \begin_layout Description
9096 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9097 You can't nest anything into them.
9101 \begin_layout Itemize
9107 \begin_layout Itemize
9113 \begin_layout Itemize
9119 \begin_layout Itemize
9125 \begin_layout Itemize
9131 \begin_layout Itemize
9137 \begin_layout Itemize
9143 \begin_layout Itemize
9149 \begin_layout Itemize
9155 \begin_layout Itemize
9161 \begin_layout Itemize
9167 \begin_layout Itemize
9173 \begin_layout Itemize
9179 \begin_layout Itemize
9183 \begin_inset space ~
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9205 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9215 \begin_inset space ~
9218 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9219 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9220 nested section headings violate this.
9228 \begin_layout Subsection
9229 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9230 \begin_inset Index idx
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9234 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9242 \begin_layout Standard
9243 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9244 affected by nesting anyhow.
9248 \begin_layout Itemize
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9256 \begin_layout Itemize
9260 \begin_layout Standard
9262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 Figures and tables in
9274 are not affected by this.
9279 Have a look at section
9280 \begin_inset space ~
9284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9286 reference "sec:Floats"
9290 for more information about
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9299 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9300 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9304 \begin_layout Standard
9305 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9313 of its own, it behaves just like a
9314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9321 paragraph environment.
9322 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 Here's an example with a table:
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 This is (a) and it's nested.
9340 \begin_layout Standard
9341 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9349 \begin_inset Tabular
9350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9437 \begin_layout Standard
9438 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9451 \begin_layout Enumerate
9455 \begin_layout Standard
9456 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9459 \begin_layout Enumerate
9464 \begin_layout Enumerate
9465 This is (a) and it's nested.
9469 \begin_layout Standard
9470 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9476 \begin_layout Standard
9478 \begin_inset Tabular
9479 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9480 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9481 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9482 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9566 \begin_layout Standard
9567 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9573 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9583 \begin_layout Enumerate
9587 \begin_layout Standard
9588 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9592 \begin_layout Standard
9593 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9596 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9599 \begin_layout Enumerate
9604 \begin_layout Enumerate
9605 This is (a) and it's nested.
9608 \begin_layout Standard
9609 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9615 \begin_layout Standard
9617 \begin_inset Tabular
9618 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9619 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9706 \begin_layout Standard
9707 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9713 \begin_layout Enumerate
9715 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9726 \begin_layout Standard
9727 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9733 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9734 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9738 \begin_layout Subsection
9739 Usage and General Features
9742 \begin_layout Standard
9743 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9744 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9753 is the innermost possible depth.
9754 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 level #1 – outermost
9762 \begin_layout Enumerate
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 \begin_layout Enumerate
9777 \begin_layout Itemize
9782 \begin_layout Itemize
9791 \begin_layout Standard
9792 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9793 both of them in the example.
9794 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9804 For example, if we tried to nest another
9809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9816 , we would get errors.
9819 \begin_layout Subsection
9821 \begin_inset Index idx
9824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9833 \begin_layout Standard
9834 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9835 We have several examples of nested environments.
9836 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9841 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9844 \begin_layout Labeling
9845 \labelwidthstring MMM
9846 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9855 \begin_layout Labeling
9856 \labelwidthstring MMM
9857 #2-a This is level #2.
9858 We created it by using
9861 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9867 arg "depth-increment"
9874 \begin_layout Labeling
9875 \labelwidthstring MMM
9876 #3-a This is level #3.
9877 This time, we just enter
9884 arg "depth-increment"
9888 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9892 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9898 arg "depth-increment"
9905 \begin_layout Standard
9910 environment, nested inside of
9911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9919 So, it's at level #4.
9920 We did this by entering
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9929 arg "depth-increment"
9932 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9937 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9953 \begin_layout Standard
9958 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9961 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9967 \begin_layout Labeling
9968 \labelwidthstring MMM
9969 #4-a This is level #4.
9973 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9976 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9981 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9985 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9990 keep nesting things inside
9991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10002 \begin_layout Labeling
10003 \labelwidthstring MMM
10004 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10009 \begin_layout Labeling
10010 \labelwidthstring MMM
10011 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10012 and this is level #6.
10013 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10017 \begin_layout Labeling
10018 \labelwidthstring MMM
10019 #5-b Back to level #5.
10023 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10029 arg "depth-decrement"
10036 \begin_layout Labeling
10037 \labelwidthstring MMM
10041 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10047 arg "depth-decrement"
10050 , we're back at level #4.
10054 \begin_layout Labeling
10055 \labelwidthstring MMM
10056 #3-b Back to level #3.
10057 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10061 \begin_layout Labeling
10062 \labelwidthstring MMM
10063 #2-b Back to level #2.
10067 \begin_layout Labeling
10068 \labelwidthstring MMM
10069 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10070 After this sentence, we will enter
10074 and change the paragraph environment back to
10081 \begin_layout Standard
10082 We could have also used the
10098 environment in place of the
10103 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10107 Example 2: Inheritance
10110 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10111 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10114 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10123 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 which, we will change to the
10138 \begin_layout Enumerate
10143 environment, at level #2.
10146 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 Notice how the nested
10151 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10155 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10160 We ended this example by entering
10165 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10169 and reset the nesting depth by using
10172 arg "depth-decrement"
10178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10179 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10188 \begin_inset Argument 1
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10200 \begin_layout Enumerate
10201 This is level #1, in an
10205 paragraph environment.
10206 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10210 \begin_layout Enumerate
10215 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10221 arg "depth-increment"
10225 Now, what happens if we nest an
10229 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10230 label be? An asterisk?
10234 \begin_layout Itemize
10244 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10245 So, its label is a bullet.
10246 (We got here by using
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10255 arg "depth-increment"
10258 , then changing the environment to
10266 \begin_layout Itemize
10267 Here's level #4, produced using
10270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10276 arg "depth-increment"
10280 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10285 \begin_layout Enumerate
10287 to get to level #5.
10288 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10293 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10297 , because we are in the
10305 environment (that is, it is an
10320 \begin_layout Enumerate
10325 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10326 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10330 \begin_layout Enumerate
10331 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10334 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10337 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10340 \begin_layout Enumerate
10344 arg "depth-decrement"
10347 to decrease the depth after the next
10350 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10359 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10364 \begin_layout Enumerate
10366 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10367 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10371 \begin_layout Enumerate
10372 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10381 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10386 reset the counter for the label.
10390 \begin_layout Enumerate
10394 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10400 arg "depth-decrement"
10403 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10404 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10405 into the twofold-nested
10413 \begin_layout Enumerate
10414 The same thing happens if we do another
10417 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10423 arg "depth-decrement"
10426 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10435 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10446 The number of other
10450 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10457 The same rule applies for the
10461 environment, as well.
10464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10465 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10468 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10470 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10471 the same detail with how we did it.
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10488 arg "depth-increment"
10495 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10496 the example in parentheses someplace.
10497 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10498 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10499 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10508 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10512 \begin_layout Verse
10513 Now we will add verse.
10514 \begin_inset Newline newline
10517 It will get much worse.
10518 \begin_inset Newline newline
10528 arg "depth-increment"
10538 \begin_layout Verse
10539 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10540 \begin_inset Newline newline
10543 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10544 \begin_inset Newline newline
10550 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10558 \begin_layout Verse
10559 Here comes a table:
10563 \begin_layout Standard
10564 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10572 \begin_inset Tabular
10573 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10574 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10661 \begin_layout Verse
10665 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10675 arg "depth-increment"
10681 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10687 \begin_inset Newline newline
10695 arg "depth-decrement"
10702 \begin_layout Enumerate
10707 : level #1) This is another item.
10708 Note that selecting a
10712 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10713 3 times to put the table inside the
10720 \begin_layout Quotation
10721 We're now ending the
10725 list and changing to
10730 We're still at level #1.
10731 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10732 The next set of paragraphs is a
10733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10740 We will nest both the
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10752 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10756 for the letter body.
10760 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10763 to preserve the depth.
10764 Remember that you need to use
10767 arg "newline-insert newline"
10770 to create multiple lines inside the
10777 \begin_inset space ~
10787 \begin_layout Right Address
10789 \begin_inset Newline newline
10792 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10793 \begin_inset Newline newline
10799 \begin_layout Address
10801 \begin_inset space ~
10807 \begin_layout Quotation
10808 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10812 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10813 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10814 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10815 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10816 as soon as possible.
10817 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10820 \begin_layout Quotation
10821 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10822 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10823 with your order, along with payment.
10826 \begin_layout Quotation
10827 We thank you again for your patience.
10830 \begin_layout Address
10832 \begin_inset Newline newline
10839 \begin_layout Quotation
10840 That ends that example!
10843 \begin_layout Standard
10844 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10845 gives you a lot of power with just
10847 We could have easily nested an
10868 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10871 \begin_layout Subsection
10873 \begin_inset Index idx
10876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10877 Nesting ! Separation
10883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10885 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10892 \begin_layout Standard
10893 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10895 For example you need two different enumerations:
10898 \begin_layout Enumerate
10903 \begin_layout Enumerate
10908 \begin_layout Enumerate
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10913 \begin_inset Separator plain
10919 \begin_layout Itemize
10925 \begin_layout Standard
10926 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10932 \begin_layout Enumerate
10936 \begin_layout Enumerate
10940 \begin_layout Enumerate
10944 \begin_layout Standard
10945 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10946 list item and use the menu
10948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10949 Separated <Name> Above
10953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10954 Separated <Name> Below
10957 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10958 ) and before or behind it the
10960 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10963 \begin_layout Standard
10964 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10965 (red arrow in LyX).
10966 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10967 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10970 \begin_layout Standard
10971 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10974 arg "paragraph-break"
10981 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10984 \begin_layout Section
10985 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
10986 \begin_inset Index idx
10989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10998 \begin_layout Standard
10999 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11000 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11002 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11003 be broken at the end of a line.
11004 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11008 \begin_layout Subsection
11010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11012 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11017 \begin_inset Index idx
11020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11030 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11031 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11032 ) not to break the line at
11034 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11037 \begin_layout Quote
11038 Further documentation is given in section
11039 \begin_inset Newline newline
11043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11045 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11053 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11068 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11077 A protected space is set with
11079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11080 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11082 \begin_inset space ~
11090 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11096 \begin_layout Subsection
11098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11100 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11105 \begin_inset Index idx
11108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 Spacing ! Horizontal
11117 \begin_layout Standard
11118 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11121 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11125 The length units are listed in Appendix
11126 \begin_inset space ~
11130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11132 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11143 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11148 \begin_inset Index idx
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 Spaces ! Inter-word
11160 \begin_layout Standard
11161 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11162 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11163 at the ends of sentences.
11164 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11165 automatically takes care about this.
11166 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11167 followed by a period; see section
11168 \begin_inset space ~
11172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11174 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11179 To insert a normal space, select
11181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11182 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11192 arg "space-insert normal"
11198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11202 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11207 \begin_inset Index idx
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_layout Standard
11221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11228 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11237 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11238 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11239 inside abbreviations:
11242 \begin_layout Quote
11244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11248 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11251 \begin_layout Standard
11252 or between values and units.
11253 Compare for example this:
11254 \begin_inset Newline newline
11258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 \begin_inset Newline newline
11265 10 kg (normal space
11268 \begin_layout Standard
11269 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11272 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11274 \begin_inset space ~
11282 arg "space-insert thin"
11288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11292 \begin_layout Standard
11293 You can also insert the following space types:
11296 \begin_layout Description
11298 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11300 \begin_inset space ~
11306 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11310 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11314 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11318 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11320 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11323 space between the arrows.
11324 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11328 \begin_layout Description
11330 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11332 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11336 \begin_inset space ~
11339 space A line with a
11340 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11344 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11348 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11352 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11354 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11357 space between the arrows.
11360 \begin_layout Description
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11369 space A line with a
11370 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11374 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11378 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11381 negative thin space between the arrows.
11384 \begin_layout Description
11386 \begin_inset space ~
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11393 space A line with a
11394 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11398 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11402 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11405 negative medium space between the arrows.
11408 \begin_layout Description
11410 \begin_inset space ~
11414 \begin_inset space ~
11417 space A line with a
11418 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11422 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11426 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11429 negative thick space between the arrows.
11432 \begin_layout Description
11434 \begin_inset space ~
11438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11442 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11446 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11450 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11454 \begin_inset space ~
11458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11461 em) space between the arrows.
11464 \begin_layout Description
11466 \begin_inset space ~
11470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11478 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11482 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11486 \begin_inset space ~
11490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11493 em) space between the arrows.
11496 \begin_layout Description
11498 \begin_inset space ~
11502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11506 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11510 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11514 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11525 em) space between the arrows.
11528 \begin_layout Description
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11538 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11543 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11550 cm space between the arrows.
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11561 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11565 lists the different space sizes.
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 \begin_inset Float table
11576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11577 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11582 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11586 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_inset Tabular
11597 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11598 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11599 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11600 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11697 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11703 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11714 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11725 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11731 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11772 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11945 feature for adding extra space
11946 in a uniform fashion.
11947 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11948 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11949 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11950 equally between themselves.
11953 \begin_layout Standard
11954 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11957 \begin_layout Quote
11959 This is on the left side
11960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11963 This is on the right
11966 \begin_layout Quote
11969 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11979 \begin_layout Quote
11982 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11986 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11990 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11996 \begin_layout Standard
11997 That was an example in the
12003 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12007 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12011 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12014 is one in a standard paragraph.
12015 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12019 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12023 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12026 \begin_inset space ~
12031 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12036 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12040 \begin_inset space ~
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12064 \begin_inset space ~
12070 \begin_layout Standard
12072 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12076 \begin_inset space ~
12082 \begin_layout Standard
12084 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12086 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12090 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12091 (= opened downwards)
12094 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12098 \begin_inset space ~
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12106 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12116 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12126 \begin_layout Standard
12127 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12135 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12139 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12141 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12142 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12146 option in the space dialog.
12154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12158 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12163 \begin_inset Index idx
12166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12177 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12184 What is correct English?:
12185 \begin_inset Newline newline
12189 \begin_inset Newline newline
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12196 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12197 \begin_inset Newline newline
12201 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12212 \begin_inset Newline newline
12216 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12227 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12235 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12240 \begin_inset space ~
12244 \begin_inset space ~
12248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12252 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12276 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12285 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12286 That is why it is named
12287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12295 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12296 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12300 \begin_layout Subsection
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12304 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12309 \begin_inset Index idx
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12321 \begin_layout Standard
12322 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12324 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12325 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12327 \begin_inset space ~
12333 There you find the following sizes:
12336 \begin_layout Standard
12349 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12350 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12355 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12358 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12370 Document ! Settings
12375 for the paragraph separation.
12376 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12385 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12391 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12400 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12401 size including line spacing.
12406 \begin_layout Standard
12412 \begin_inset Index idx
12415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12421 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12422 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12427 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12428 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12437 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 s are described in section
12447 \begin_inset space ~
12451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12453 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12462 If there are several
12466 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12467 You can therefore use
12471 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12474 \begin_layout Standard
12479 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12480 \begin_inset space ~
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12486 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12505 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12517 \begin_layout Subsection
12518 Paragraph Alignment
12519 \begin_inset Index idx
12522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12523 Paragraph ! Alignment
12531 \begin_layout Standard
12532 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12537 dialog (toolbar button
12540 arg "layout-paragraph"
12544 There are five possibilities:
12547 \begin_layout Itemize
12555 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12561 \begin_layout Itemize
12569 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12575 \begin_layout Itemize
12583 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12589 \begin_layout Itemize
12597 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12603 \begin_layout Itemize
12611 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12617 \begin_layout Standard
12618 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12619 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12620 the left and right margins.
12621 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12624 \begin_layout Standard
12626 This paragraph is right aligned,
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12631 this one is centered,
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12636 this one is left aligned.
12639 \begin_layout Subsection
12641 \begin_inset Index idx
12644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12645 Page breaks ! Forced
12651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12653 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12660 \begin_layout Standard
12661 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12662 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12663 force a page break where you want one.
12664 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12665 is good at page breaking.
12666 Only if you use a lot of
12670 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12676 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12680 have to change the page breaking.
12683 \begin_layout Standard
12684 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12686 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12689 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12691 \begin_inset space ~
12697 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12702 \begin_inset space ~
12707 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12709 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12710 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12713 \begin_layout Standard
12714 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12715 at the top of a page.
12716 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12718 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12719 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12720 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12724 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12728 to learn more about
12735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12739 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12744 \begin_inset Index idx
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 Page breaks ! Clear
12756 \begin_layout Standard
12757 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12758 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12759 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12760 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12761 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12765 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12776 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12779 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12785 \begin_inset space ~
12790 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12791 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12792 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
12796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12798 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
12799 Suppressing Page Breaks
12802 \begin_inset Index idx
12805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12807 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
12811 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
12820 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
12822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12824 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
12829 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12835 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
12836 To discourage page break at
12837 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
12839 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
12840 certain point you can use
12844 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12846 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
12849 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12851 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
12858 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
12859 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
12860 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
12861 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
12866 \begin_layout Subsection
12868 \begin_inset Index idx
12871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12880 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12887 \begin_layout Standard
12888 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12890 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12893 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12895 \begin_inset space ~
12899 \begin_inset space ~
12907 arg "newline-insert newline"
12911 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12914 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12916 \begin_inset space ~
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12928 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12931 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12933 This is useful to avoid
12934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12941 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12944 \begin_layout Standard
12945 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12946 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12948 very good at line breaking.
12949 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12950 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12951 \begin_inset space ~
12955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12957 reference "sec:Quote"
12962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12964 reference "sec:Verse"
12969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12971 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12978 \begin_layout Subsection
12980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12982 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12987 \begin_inset Index idx
12990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12999 \begin_layout Standard
13001 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13012 \begin_layout Standard
13016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13017 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13024 you can insert horizontal lines.
13025 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13026 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13027 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13030 \begin_layout Standard
13032 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13043 \begin_layout Section
13044 Characters and Symbols
13047 \begin_layout Standard
13048 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13049 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13050 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13058 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13062 for information on how this is done.
13065 \begin_layout Standard
13066 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13071 dialog via the menu
13073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13074 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13080 \begin_layout Standard
13081 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13089 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13090 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13092 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13100 \begin_layout Section
13101 Fonts and Text Styles
13102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13104 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13111 \begin_layout Subsection
13113 \begin_inset Index idx
13116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13126 There are two types of fonts:
13129 \begin_layout Description
13131 \begin_inset space ~
13135 \begin_inset Index idx
13138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13144 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13149 characters) in the font.
13150 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13151 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13152 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13153 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13154 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13155 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13156 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13157 \begin_inset Newline newline
13160 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13161 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13162 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13163 sizes than at small ones.
13164 \begin_inset Newline newline
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13186 \begin_layout Description
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13192 \begin_inset Index idx
13195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13201 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13202 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13203 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13204 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13205 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13206 image manipulation program.
13207 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13208 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13209 \begin_inset space ~
13212 pixels high up to 34
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13216 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13217 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13218 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13220 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13221 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13222 \begin_inset Newline newline
13225 Bitmap fonts are named
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13233 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13236 \begin_layout Standard
13237 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13238 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13239 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13240 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13241 use scalable fonts.
13244 \begin_layout Standard
13245 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13248 \begin_layout Standard
13249 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13253 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13256 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13257 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13258 font, to emphasize text you use an
13259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13267 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13269 In \SpecialChar LyX
13270 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13274 \begin_layout Subsection
13277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13279 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13286 \begin_layout Standard
13287 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13288 used its own fonts.
13289 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13290 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13293 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13294 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13295 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13296 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13297 to a word processor.
13298 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13299 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13300 files are very portable across
13301 different machines.
13302 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13303 has increased a lot
13304 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13307 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13315 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13320 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13321 code in the document
13322 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13325 \begin_layout Standard
13326 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13327 engines that are also able directly
13328 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13330 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13332 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13334 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13335 that is installed on your system.
13336 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13339 \begin_layout Standard
13340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13348 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13349 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13357 \begin_layout Subsection
13358 Document Font and Font size
13359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13361 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13366 \begin_inset Index idx
13369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13376 \begin_inset Index idx
13379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13388 \begin_layout Standard
13389 You can set the document fonts in the
13391 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13395 \begin_inset Index idx
13398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13399 Document ! Settings
13409 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13410 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13413 \begin_inset space ~
13422 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13424 \begin_inset space ~
13427 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13430 \begin_layout Standard
13435 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13436 This requires that you use
13448 as the output format, i.
13449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13453 \begin_inset space \space{}
13456 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13457 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13458 installed (see section
13459 \begin_inset space ~
13463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13465 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13470 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13472 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13473 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13475 \begin_inset space ~
13478 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13479 cannot determine the family.
13480 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13481 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13484 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13487 \begin_layout Standard
13488 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13489 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13494 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13500 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13502 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13504 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13507 font encoding, this is
13508 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13509 , depending on the document language,
13512 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13513 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13521 \begin_inset space ~
13527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13537 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13538 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13546 \begin_inset space ~
13552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13560 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13581 European Computer Modern
13584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13592 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13595 \begin_layout Standard
13600 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13601 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13606 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13609 \begin_inset space ~
13614 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13620 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13621 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13624 \begin_layout Itemize
13628 \begin_inset space ~
13633 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13651 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13652 community in order to replace
13656 as the default font.
13657 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13658 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13661 \begin_inset space ~
13674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13675 One difference is improved kerning.
13683 \begin_layout Itemize
13684 If you do not like the look of
13692 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13697 \begin_inset space ~
13703 \begin_inset space ~
13713 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13714 \begin_inset space ~
13717 serif and typewriter fonts,
13721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13722 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13729 \begin_inset space ~
13738 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13743 \begin_inset space \space{}
13751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13755 \begin_inset space \space{}
13761 \begin_inset space ~
13769 \begin_inset space ~
13779 but you can also select your own.
13780 \begin_inset Newline newline
13783 The differences between roman,
13786 \begin_inset space ~
13795 fonts are explained in section
13796 \begin_inset space ~
13800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13802 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13807 \begin_inset Newline newline
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13818 was originally designed for newspapers.
13819 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13820 into the small newspaper columns.
13824 \begin_inset space ~
13829 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13832 \begin_layout Standard
13833 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13846 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13851 depends on the class you are using.
13852 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13855 \begin_layout Standard
13856 Note that the font size is the
13861 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13862 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13863 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13864 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13867 \begin_inset space ~
13873 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13874 \begin_inset space ~
13878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13880 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13887 \begin_layout Standard
13891 \begin_inset space ~
13896 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13898 \begin_inset space ~
13901 serif or typewriter.
13906 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13916 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13919 \begin_layout Standard
13924 LaTeX font encoding
13926 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13927 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13933 \begin_inset Index idx
13936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13944 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13946 \begin_inset space ~
13950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13952 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13959 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13960 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13961 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13965 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13973 \begin_layout Standard
13974 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13976 Use Old Style Figures
13980 Use True Small Caps
13983 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13986 Use Old Style Figures
13988 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13990 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13998 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14002 Use True Small Caps
14004 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14005 of scaled capitals.
14006 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14007 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14008 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14012 \begin_layout Standard
14014 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14015 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14016 provided by the font package (or the
14020 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14025 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14031 \begin_layout Standard
14036 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14037 a font to display the script characters.
14041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14042 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14048 \begin_inset Index idx
14051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14058 So this has no effect for the document language
14074 \begin_layout Standard
14077 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14079 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14080 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14086 \begin_inset Index idx
14089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14091 packages ! microtype
14100 \begin_layout Standard
14103 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14105 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14110 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14111 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14117 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14118 \begin_inset space ~
14122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14124 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14134 \begin_layout Standard
14135 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14139 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14147 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14152 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14153 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14155 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14157 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14160 dialog, see section
14161 \begin_inset space ~
14165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14167 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14179 \begin_layout Subsection
14183 \begin_layout Standard
14184 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14185 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14187 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14188 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14189 choose a math font in the dialog
14191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14195 \begin_inset Index idx
14198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14199 Document ! Settings
14205 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14206 automatically selects a math font.
14207 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14208 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14217 \begin_inset space ~
14223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14228 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14229 document font is available.
14232 \begin_layout Standard
14233 Note that the math font will not be used for
14237 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14243 or by the insertion of the command
14250 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14251 \begin_inset space ~
14255 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14256 while the math characters do not.
14258 \begin_inset space ~
14261 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14264 \begin_inset space ~
14272 \begin_inset space ~
14277 in the document font settings.
14280 \begin_layout Standard
14281 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14282 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14283 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14284 font (in most cases
14285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14291 \begin_inset space ~
14297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14300 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14301 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14309 \begin_inset space ~
14315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14321 \begin_layout Subsection
14323 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14333 name "subsec:charstyles"
14340 \begin_inset Index idx
14343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14350 \begin_inset Index idx
14353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14362 \begin_layout Standard
14363 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14364 automatically changes the
14365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14368 style for certain paragraph environments.
14370 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14371 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14373 This is where we meet the concept of
14379 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14385 \begin_layout Standard
14387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14392 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14407 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14416 e., available with all document classes.
14417 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14421 for specific purposes.
14422 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14425 \begin_layout Standard
14427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14428 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14438 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14442 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14455 — you customized the
14460 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14461 among them, encourage the use of
14473 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14474 \begin_inset space ~
14478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14480 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14485 Rather than fiddling with
14489 , they encourage the use of
14493 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14498 \begin_inset Quotes els
14502 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14505 ), not their form (
14506 \begin_inset Quotes els
14510 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14514 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14515 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14516 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14517 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14518 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14519 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14525 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14529 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14530 With a semantic markup (such as
14534 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14539 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14541 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14542 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14545 \begin_layout Standard
14547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14548 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14549 by \SpecialChar LyX
14555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14557 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14558 Builtin Text Styles
14559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14561 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14568 \begin_layout Standard
14570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14571 The two builtin text styles can be
14572 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14576 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14580 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14581 both of these styles
14584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14592 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14598 \begin_layout Standard
14603 style, do one of the following:
14606 \begin_layout Itemize
14607 click on the toolbar button
14616 \begin_layout Itemize
14617 use the key binding
14624 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14628 \begin_layout Itemize
14630 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14638 arg "dialog-show character"
14644 arg "dialog-show character"
14647 ) as described in section
14648 \begin_inset space ~
14652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14654 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14663 \begin_layout Standard
14664 These commands are all toggles.
14669 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14672 \begin_layout Standard
14673 One typically uses the
14677 style for proper names.
14679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14686 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14692 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14696 \begin_layout Standard
14698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14703 is producing text in
14707 , but the definition can be changed.
14712 \begin_layout Standard
14714 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14724 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14731 \begin_layout Itemize
14732 clicking on the toolbar button
14741 \begin_layout Itemize
14742 using the keybindings
14749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14753 \begin_layout Itemize
14755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14763 arg "dialog-show character"
14769 arg "dialog-show character"
14772 ) as described in section
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14779 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14788 \begin_layout Standard
14793 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14795 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14797 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14800 packages use a different font
14801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14802 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14808 \begin_layout Standard
14809 We've been using the
14813 style all over the place in this document.
14814 Here's one more example:
14817 \begin_layout Quotation
14821 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14829 \begin_layout Standard
14830 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14831 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14832 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14833 the common tendency to overuse
14834 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14841 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14843 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14847 \begin_layout Standard
14849 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14850 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14851 only as font changes and integrated in the
14859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14862 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14869 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14871 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14875 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14878 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14880 \begin_inset space ~
14883 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14891 arg "dialog-show character"
14897 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14899 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14905 arg "dialog-show character"
14909 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14915 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14919 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14926 \begin_layout Standard
14928 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14929 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14931 \begin_inset space ~
14935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14937 reference "subsec:Modules"
14944 ), or local layout settings (see section
14945 \begin_inset space ~
14949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14951 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14956 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14960 markup for specific functions.
14961 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14966 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14976 \begin_inset Quotes els
14980 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14986 \begin_layout Standard
14988 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14989 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14991 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14997 \begin_layout Standard
14999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15000 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15005 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15006 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15007 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15012 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15013 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15018 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15026 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15027 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15028 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15029 \begin_inset Flex Code
15032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15043 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15057 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15071 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15072 on screen their formal appearance.
15077 \begin_layout Subsection
15079 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15091 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15093 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15099 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15101 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15107 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15112 \begin_inset Index idx
15115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15124 \begin_layout Standard
15125 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15129 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15131 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15137 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15138 the properties of text passages
15139 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15143 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15144 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15145 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15146 from ordinary dialog.
15147 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15151 \begin_layout Standard
15153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15154 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15155 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15156 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15157 the properties of the respective text passages.
15162 comes in as a last resort.
15167 \begin_layout Standard
15168 Before we document how to
15169 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15170 use custom character style
15171 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15172 tweak the text properties
15174 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15175 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15177 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15181 \begin_inset Newline newline
15184 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15185 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15188 \begin_layout Standard
15190 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15191 use custom character styles
15192 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15193 tweak text properties
15196 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15199 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15201 \begin_inset space ~
15204 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15206 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15212 arg "dialog-show character"
15217 dialog or press the toolbar button
15220 arg "dialog-show character"
15225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15228 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15229 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15231 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15234 property that you can choose.
15235 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15238 \begin_inset space ~
15243 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15256 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15257 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15258 environments all at once.
15261 \begin_layout Standard
15263 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15265 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15268 properties, and their options (in addition to
15271 \begin_inset space ~
15277 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15281 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15289 \begin_layout Labeling
15290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 The possible options are:
15308 \begin_layout Labeling
15309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15314 This is the Roman font family.
15315 Normally a serif font.
15316 It's also the default family.
15326 \begin_layout Labeling
15327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15331 \begin_inset space ~
15338 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15350 \begin_layout Labeling
15351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15358 This is the Typewriter font family.
15364 arg "font-typewriter"
15370 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15374 \begin_layout Standard
15376 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15377 The general differences of these families are:
15380 \begin_layout Itemize
15382 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15387 fonts use characters with serifs.
15388 These are the small
15389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15396 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15397 The following example shows the difference:
15398 \begin_inset Newline newline
15402 \begin_inset Newline newline
15407 text without serifs
15410 \begin_inset Newline newline
15413 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15414 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15421 \begin_layout Itemize
15423 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15428 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15429 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15430 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15433 \begin_layout Itemize
15435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15448 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 \begin_inset Newline newline
15470 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15475 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15488 \begin_inset Note Note
15491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15493 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15494 For more on phantoms see section
15495 \begin_inset space ~
15499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15501 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15511 \begin_inset Newline newline
15520 \begin_layout Labeling
15521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15526 This corresponds to the print weight.
15531 \begin_layout Labeling
15532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15537 This is the Medium font series.
15538 It's also the default series.
15541 \begin_layout Labeling
15542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15549 This is the Bold font series.
15562 \begin_layout Labeling
15563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15568 As the name implies.
15573 \begin_layout Labeling
15574 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15579 This is the Upright font shape.
15580 It's also the default shape.
15583 \begin_layout Labeling
15584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15594 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15604 s the Italic font shape
15610 \begin_layout Labeling
15611 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15618 This is the Slanted font shape
15620 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15621 , this is different from italic).
15624 \begin_layout Labeling
15625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15636 This is the Small caps font shape
15643 \begin_layout Labeling
15644 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15649 Alters the text color.
15650 Note that not all DVI
15651 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15653 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15656 viewers are able to display colors.
15658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15662 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15664 \begin_inset space ~
15671 , which means that the document default color set in
15673 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15674 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15680 \begin_inset space ~
15686 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15688 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15692 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15772 \begin_inset Index idx
15775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15782 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15788 \begin_layout Labeling
15789 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15794 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15795 the language of the document.
15796 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15798 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15801 in blue to indicate the change
15802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15803 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15807 \begin_inset Newline newline
15810 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15812 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15813 When using the spell checking (see section
15814 \begin_inset space ~
15818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15820 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15824 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15825 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15827 \begin_inset Newline newline
15830 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15832 Exclude from Spellchecking
15835 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15838 \begin_layout Labeling
15839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15844 Alters the size of the font.
15846 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15848 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15852 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15855 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15856 document font size.
15857 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15858 the details, but a general description of what
15864 \begin_layout Labeling
15865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15886 arg "font-size tiny"
15892 \begin_layout Labeling
15893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15914 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15920 \begin_layout Labeling
15921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15942 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15948 \begin_layout Labeling
15949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15970 arg "font-size small"
15976 \begin_layout Labeling
15977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15991 It's also the default size.
15995 arg "font-size normal"
16001 \begin_layout Labeling
16002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16023 arg "font-size large"
16029 \begin_layout Labeling
16030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16051 arg "font-size larger"
16057 \begin_layout Labeling
16058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16079 arg "font-size largest"
16085 \begin_layout Labeling
16086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16107 arg "font-size huge"
16113 \begin_layout Labeling
16114 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16135 arg "font-size giant"
16141 \begin_layout Labeling
16142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16147 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16167 arg "font-size increase"
16173 \begin_layout Labeling
16174 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16179 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16199 arg "font-size decrease"
16206 \begin_layout Standard
16211 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16212 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16214 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16215 — use those instead.
16216 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16219 \begin_layout Labeling
16220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16222 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16226 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16232 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16233 change a few other things at the character level
16234 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16235 have text passages being underlined
16239 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16240 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16241 days, when you could not change fonts.
16242 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16243 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16244 because some people
16248 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16255 \begin_layout Labeling
16256 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16258 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16265 This is text with emphasize on
16268 This might seem like the same as
16272 , but it is actually a bit different.
16278 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16280 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16281 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16285 \begin_layout Labeling
16286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16293 Don't use underlining.
16298 \begin_layout Labeling
16299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16301 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16315 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16324 arg "font-underline"
16330 \begin_inset Newline newline
16334 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16337 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16338 when you could not change fonts.
16339 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16340 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16341 because some people
16345 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16350 \begin_layout Labeling
16351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16355 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16357 \begin_inset space ~
16366 This is text with Double under
16367 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16378 arg "font-underunderline"
16382 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16384 \begin_inset Newline newline
16387 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16388 about double underbar
16393 \begin_layout Labeling
16394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16398 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16400 \begin_inset space ~
16409 This is text with Wavy under
16410 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16412 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16421 arg "font-underwave"
16425 \begin_inset Newline newline
16428 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16429 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16435 \begin_layout Labeling
16436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16438 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16443 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16449 \begin_layout Labeling
16450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16452 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16457 Don't use strikethrough.
16460 \begin_layout Labeling
16461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16465 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16467 \begin_inset space ~
16471 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16479 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16481 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16482 Single strikethrough
16490 arg "font-strikeout"
16494 \begin_inset Newline newline
16497 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16498 changed in the meantime.
16501 \begin_layout Labeling
16502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16508 \begin_inset space ~
16512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16514 \begin_inset space ~
16518 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16526 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16528 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16534 \begin_inset Newline newline
16537 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16541 \begin_layout Standard
16543 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16544 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16545 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16546 \begin_inset space ~
16550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16552 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16559 \begin_layout Itemize
16561 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16568 This is text with emphasize on
16573 \begin_layout Itemize
16577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16584 This is text with Noun on.
16586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16593 , this is a logical attribute.
16594 Normally it's equivalent to
16597 \begin_inset space ~
16607 \begin_layout Standard
16608 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16616 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16617 chosen a new character style
16618 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16619 applied a text property
16622 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16625 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16627 \begin_inset space ~
16630 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16632 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16638 arg "dialog-show character"
16646 arg "dialog-show character"
16649 ) dialog, the settings are
16650 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16654 You can activate the
16655 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16658 last applied properties
16660 by using the toolbar button
16663 arg "textstyle-apply"
16667 The button lets you apply
16668 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16669 your custom character style
16670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16673 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16675 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16676 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16677 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16678 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16683 \begin_layout Standard
16684 To completely reset the
16685 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16687 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16688 text properties of a selection
16690 to the default, use
16691 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16693 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16703 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16708 from the menu of the toolbar button
16711 arg "textstyle-apply"
16718 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16719 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16720 you just set the shape to
16721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16739 \begin_inset space ~
16753 \begin_layout Standard
16755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16756 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16764 \begin_inset space ~
16776 \begin_layout Itemize
16778 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16791 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16809 \begin_inset Newline newline
16813 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16827 \begin_inset Note Note
16830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16831 For more on phantoms see section
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16838 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16848 \begin_inset Newline newline
16854 \begin_layout Itemize
16856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16861 fonts use characters with serifs.
16862 These are the small
16863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16870 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16871 The following example shows the difference:
16872 \begin_inset Newline newline
16876 \begin_inset Newline newline
16881 text without serifs
16884 \begin_inset Newline newline
16887 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16888 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16897 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16902 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16903 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16904 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16909 \begin_layout Standard
16911 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16919 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16920 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16923 \begin_inset space ~
16928 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16929 the property to be removed.
16930 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16931 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16932 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16950 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16951 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16959 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16963 \begin_inset space ~
16968 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16979 If you, for example, set
16980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 \begin_inset space ~
17003 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17012 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17017 \begin_layout Standard
17019 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17022 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17023 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17026 \begin_layout Section
17027 Printing and Previewing
17030 \begin_layout Subsection
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17035 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17036 using \SpecialChar LyX
17037 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17038 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17039 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17040 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17042 Additional Features
17047 \begin_layout Standard
17049 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17052 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17053 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17054 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17057 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17058 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17059 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17060 to turn your writing into printable output.
17061 This happens in two stages:
17064 \begin_layout Enumerate
17065 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17066 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17068 a file with the extension,
17069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17083 \begin_layout Enumerate
17084 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17085 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17086 to use the commands in the
17090 file to produce printable output.
17093 \begin_layout Subsection
17094 Output file formats
17095 \begin_inset Index idx
17098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17107 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17114 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17116 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17118 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17122 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17126 \begin_inset Index idx
17129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17131 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17133 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17144 \begin_layout Standard
17145 This file type has the extension
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 It contains your document as plain text
17159 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17161 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17162 following the rules of the
17163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17166 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17175 \begin_layout Standard
17176 You can export your document to
17177 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17179 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17184 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17185 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17187 \begin_inset space ~
17193 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17194 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17195 bibliography (section
17196 \begin_inset space ~
17200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17202 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17207 If your document includes such material, use
17209 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17210 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17212 \begin_inset space ~
17216 \begin_inset space ~
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17232 \begin_inset space ~
17238 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17239 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17240 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17242 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17251 \begin_inset Index idx
17254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17255 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17264 \begin_layout Standard
17265 This file type has the extension
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17277 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17280 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17281 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17282 -Errors or to process it manually
17283 with console commands.
17284 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17285 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17286 's temporary directory whenever you
17287 view or export your document.
17290 \begin_layout Standard
17291 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17292 -file using the menu
17294 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17299 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17300 export variants are explained in section
17301 \begin_inset space ~
17305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17307 reference "subsec:Export"
17314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17316 \begin_inset Index idx
17319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17328 \begin_layout Standard
17329 This file type has the extension
17330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17350 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17351 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17352 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17357 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17358 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17359 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17360 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17361 when you view the DVI.
17362 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17365 \begin_layout Standard
17366 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17368 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17369 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17374 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17375 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17383 The latter option uses the program
17385 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17391 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17394 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17395 font access (see section
17396 \begin_inset space ~
17400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17402 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17407 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17408 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17415 \begin_inset Index idx
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17419 File formats ! PostScript
17427 \begin_layout Standard
17428 This file type has the extension
17429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17441 PostScript was developed by the company
17445 as a printer language.
17446 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17448 PostScript can be seen as a
17449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17452 programming language
17453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17456 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17461 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17468 \begin_inset Index idx
17471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17473 packages ! pstricks
17483 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17491 Encapsulated PostScript
17492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17495 (EPS, file extension
17496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17508 As \SpecialChar LyX
17509 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17510 convert them in the background to EPS.
17511 If, for example, you have 50
17512 \begin_inset space ~
17515 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17517 \begin_inset space ~
17520 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17521 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17523 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17524 EPS to avoid this problem.
17527 \begin_layout Standard
17528 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17530 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17531 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17539 \begin_inset Index idx
17542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17549 \begin_inset Index idx
17552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17561 \begin_layout Standard
17562 This file type has the extension
17563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17579 Portable Document Format
17580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17587 was derived from PostScript.
17588 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17597 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17598 looks exactly the same.
17601 \begin_layout Standard
17602 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17606 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17610 (JPG, file extension
17611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 Portable Network Graphics
17639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17642 (PNG, file extension
17643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17655 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17656 converts them in the
17657 background to one of these formats.
17658 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17659 will slow down your workflow.
17660 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17663 \begin_layout Standard
17664 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17666 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17672 \begin_layout Description
17674 \begin_inset space ~
17677 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17681 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17684 \begin_layout Description
17686 \begin_inset space ~
17693 ) This uses the program
17695 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17698 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17701 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17704 is a new engine, derived from
17708 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17709 access (see section
17710 \begin_inset space ~
17714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17716 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17721 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17722 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17727 \begin_layout Description
17729 \begin_inset space ~
17736 ) This uses the program
17741 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17747 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17748 font access (see section
17749 \begin_inset space ~
17753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17755 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17760 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17761 vertically written Japanese.
17764 \begin_layout Description
17766 \begin_inset space ~
17769 (cropped) This is the same as
17772 \begin_inset space ~
17777 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17778 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17779 to generate good-looking
17780 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17783 \begin_layout Description
17785 \begin_inset space ~
17788 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17792 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17796 \begin_layout Description
17798 \begin_inset space ~
17801 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17805 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17806 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17810 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17811 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17818 \begin_inset space ~
17827 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17828 works without problems.
17829 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17830 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17834 \begin_inset space ~
17842 \begin_inset space ~
17847 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17855 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17857 \begin_inset Index idx
17860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17861 FileFormats ! XHTML
17867 \begin_inset Index idx
17870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17879 \begin_layout Standard
17880 This file type has the extension
17881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17893 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17894 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17895 When \SpecialChar LyX
17896 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17897 suitable for the purpose.
17898 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17904 between different formats, which are described in section
17906 Math Output in XHTML
17911 \begin_inset space ~
17919 \begin_layout Standard
17920 XHTML output remains
17921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17928 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17929 features are supported yet.
17933 and the World Wide Web
17937 Additional Features
17939 manual, for more information.
17942 \begin_layout Standard
17943 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17945 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17946 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17952 \begin_layout Subsection
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \begin_layout Standard
17967 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17968 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17977 or use the toolbar button
17984 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17985 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17986 \begin_inset space ~
17990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17992 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17996 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17998 \begin_inset space ~
18002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18004 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18009 Further output formats can be selected via
18011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18012 View (Other Formats)
18014 or the toolbar button
18023 \begin_layout Standard
18024 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18025 viewer window using the menu
18027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18033 Update (Other Formats)
18038 \begin_layout Standard
18039 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18042 To have a real output, export your document.
18045 \begin_layout Section
18046 A few Words about Typography
18047 \begin_inset Index idx
18050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18059 \begin_layout Subsection
18060 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18061 \begin_inset Index idx
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18071 \begin_inset Index idx
18074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18083 \begin_layout Standard
18084 In \SpecialChar LyX
18086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18097 symbol comes in four variants: the
18114 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18120 \begin_layout Standard
18121 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18131 height_special "totalheight"
18136 backgroundcolor "none"
18139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18140 \begin_inset Tabular
18141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18142 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18143 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18144 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18145 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18146 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18147 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18175 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18215 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 system key combination
18242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18243 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18255 and the em dash with
18258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18271 is the Mac label for the right
18281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18294 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18317 system key combination or
18318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18332 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18345 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18384 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18390 \begin_layout Standard
18391 Dashes can also be inserted with
18393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 \begin_inset space ~
18398 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18406 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18407 and 2014 for the en dash).
18410 \begin_layout Standard
18411 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18412 mode and has a length of its own.
18413 Here are some examples:
18416 \begin_layout Enumerate
18417 line- and page-breaks
18418 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18428 \begin_layout Enumerate
18430 \begin_inset space ~
18434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18444 \begin_layout Enumerate
18445 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18456 \begin_layout Enumerate
18457 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18461 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18471 \begin_layout Standard
18473 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18475 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18476 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18484 \begin_layout Subsection
18485 Dashes and Line Breaks
18486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18488 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18495 \begin_layout Standard
18496 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18497 case and locale, e.
18498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18504 \begin_layout Itemize
18505 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18506 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18509 \begin_layout Itemize
18510 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18514 \begin_layout Itemize
18515 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18516 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18519 \begin_layout Standard
18520 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18521 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18532 allows line breaks after hyphens
18533 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18535 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18538 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18541 \begin_layout Enumerate
18542 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18543 \begin_inset space ~
18546 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18548 The Elements of Typographic Style
18551 \begin_inset space ~
18554 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18557 \begin_layout Enumerate
18558 Unwanted line breaks
18563 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18565 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18568 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 Prevent Hyphenation
18580 \begin_inset space ~
18596 in \SpecialChar TeX
18598 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18599 , a protected space does not suffice
18603 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18610 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18611 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18612 in the document language.
18613 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18627 \begin_layout Itemize
18629 \begin_inset space ~
18633 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18643 height_special "totalheight"
18648 backgroundcolor "none"
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18660 \begin_layout Itemize
18662 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18672 height_special "totalheight"
18677 backgroundcolor "none"
18680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18682 \begin_inset space ~
18690 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18691 \begin_inset space ~
18694 – sont très utiles.
18697 \begin_layout Itemize
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18711 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18716 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18717 \begin_inset space ~
18720 – in contrast to an overfull line
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18724 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18728 \begin_layout Standard
18729 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18734 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18735 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18740 \begin_layout Enumerate
18741 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18742 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18743 or \SpecialChar TeX
18749 \begin_layout Itemize
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18754 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18755 \begin_inset space ~
18758 – sont très utiles.
18762 \begin_layout Enumerate
18763 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18764 \begin_inset Newline newline
18769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18772 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18774 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18776 \begin_inset space ~
18782 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18784 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18786 \begin_inset space ~
18797 \begin_layout Itemize
18798 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18799 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18800 should be followed by
18801 a line break opportunity.
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18805 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18806 \begin_inset space ~
18810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18812 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18823 \begin_layout Enumerate
18824 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18825 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18826 or en dashes (see section
18827 \begin_inset space ~
18831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18833 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18844 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
18847 \begin_layout Standard
18848 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18850 \begin_inset space ~
18853 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18854 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18863 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18864 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18872 \begin_layout Standard
18873 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18875 \begin_inset space ~
18878 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18880 prevents ligation to dashes.
18882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18889 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18894 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18895 after the input (unless the current text font is
18903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18904 The behavior was changed since
18905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18920 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18921 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18922 as non-breakable dashes.
18923 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18931 \begin_layout Standard
18934 \begin_inset space ~
18942 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18944 \begin_inset space ~
18947 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18952 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18953 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18955 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18959 If you used both literal and
18960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18967 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18969 \begin_inset space ~
18972 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18973 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18976 \begin_layout Subsection
18978 \begin_inset Index idx
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18990 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18997 \begin_layout Standard
18998 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18999 but automatically in the output.
19000 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19006 \begin_inset Index idx
19009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19016 following the rules of the document language.
19018 does not hyphenate text in the
19022 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19025 \begin_layout Standard
19027 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19031 font and with unusual constructs, like
19032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19040 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19041 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19042 This is done with the menu
19044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19045 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19047 \begin_inset space ~
19053 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19055 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19059 \begin_layout Standard
19060 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19061 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19072 would then see the hyphen
19073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19080 as a line break possibility.
19081 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19082 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19085 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19086 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19089 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19091 Prevent Hyphenation
19096 \begin_inset space ~
19104 \begin_layout Subsection
19106 \begin_inset Index idx
19109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19119 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19122 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19129 \begin_layout Standard
19130 When \SpecialChar LyX
19131 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19132 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19134 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19140 appropriate amount of space.
19141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19144 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19146 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19147 gets after another word.
19150 \begin_layout Standard
19151 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19152 not work in all cases.
19154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19165 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19166 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19169 \begin_layout Standard
19170 Here are some examples of
19174 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19177 \begin_layout Itemize
19182 \begin_layout Itemize
19187 \begin_layout Standard
19188 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19191 \begin_layout Itemize
19193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19197 this is too much space!
19200 \begin_layout Itemize
19205 \begin_layout Standard
19206 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19209 \begin_layout Standard
19210 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19213 \begin_layout Enumerate
19217 \begin_inset space ~
19222 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19223 \begin_inset space ~
19227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19229 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19234 \begin_inset Index idx
19237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19238 Spaces ! inter-word
19246 \begin_layout Enumerate
19250 \begin_inset space ~
19255 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19256 \begin_inset space ~
19260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19262 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19267 \begin_inset Index idx
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19279 \begin_layout Enumerate
19283 \begin_inset space ~
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19300 \begin_inset space ~
19305 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19306 This function is also bound to
19309 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19315 \begin_layout Standard
19316 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19319 \begin_layout Itemize
19321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19325 \begin_inset space \space{}
19328 this is too much space!
19331 \begin_layout Itemize
19332 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19336 \begin_layout Standard
19337 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19338 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19340 will take care of this.
19343 \begin_layout Standard
19344 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19348 \begin_inset space ~
19354 feature described in the section
19356 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19361 Additional Features
19366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19368 \begin_inset Index idx
19371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 Typography ! Quotation marks
19378 \begin_inset Index idx
19381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19382 Quotation marks | see
19386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 \begin_layout Standard
19414 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19415 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19416 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19426 The keyboard character,
19430 , generates this automatically.
19433 \begin_layout Standard
19434 You can specify what character the
19438 key produces by using the submenu
19444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19448 \begin_inset Index idx
19451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 Document ! Settings
19457 dialog and switching the
19461 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19462 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19464 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19466 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19470 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_layout Labeling
19477 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19489 \begin_inset space ~
19493 \begin_inset space ~
19497 \begin_inset Quotes els
19501 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19515 \begin_inset Quotes els
19519 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19522 quotation marks (as common, e.
19523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19529 \begin_layout Labeling
19530 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19533 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19537 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19541 \begin_inset space ~
19545 \begin_inset space ~
19549 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19553 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19559 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19563 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19567 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19571 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19574 quotation marks (as common, e.
19575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19581 \begin_layout Labeling
19582 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19585 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19589 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19593 \begin_inset space ~
19597 \begin_inset space ~
19601 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19605 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19611 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19615 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19619 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19623 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19626 quotation marks (as common, e.
19627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19633 \begin_layout Labeling
19634 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19637 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19641 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19645 \begin_inset space ~
19649 \begin_inset space ~
19653 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19657 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19663 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19667 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19671 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19675 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19678 quotation marks (as common, e.
19679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19685 \begin_layout Labeling
19686 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19689 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19693 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19697 \begin_inset space ~
19701 \begin_inset space ~
19705 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19709 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19715 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19719 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19723 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19727 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19730 quotation marks (as common, e.
19731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19734 g., in Switzerland)
19737 \begin_layout Labeling
19738 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19741 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19745 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19749 \begin_inset space ~
19753 \begin_inset space ~
19757 \begin_inset Quotes als
19761 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19767 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19771 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19775 \begin_inset Quotes als
19779 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19782 quotation marks (as common, e.
19783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19789 \begin_layout Labeling
19790 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19793 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19797 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19801 \begin_inset space ~
19805 \begin_inset space ~
19809 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19813 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19819 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19823 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19827 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19831 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19834 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19837 \begin_layout Labeling
19838 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19841 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19845 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19849 \begin_inset space ~
19853 \begin_inset space ~
19857 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19861 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19867 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19871 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19875 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19879 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19882 quotation marks (as common, e.
19883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19886 g., in Great Britain)
19889 \begin_layout Labeling
19890 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19893 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19897 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19901 \begin_inset space ~
19905 \begin_inset space ~
19909 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19913 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19919 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19923 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19927 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19931 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19934 quotation marks (as common, e.
19935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19941 \begin_layout Labeling
19942 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19945 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19949 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19953 \begin_inset space ~
19957 \begin_inset space ~
19961 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19965 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19971 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19975 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19979 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19983 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19986 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19991 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19992 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19993 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19994 the inner marks differ).
20002 \begin_layout Labeling
20003 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20006 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20010 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20014 \begin_inset space ~
20018 \begin_inset space ~
20022 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20026 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20032 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20036 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20040 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20044 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20047 quotation marks (as common, e.
20048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20054 \begin_layout Labeling
20055 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20058 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20062 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20066 \begin_inset space ~
20070 \begin_inset space ~
20074 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20078 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20084 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20088 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20092 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20096 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20099 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20100 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20104 \begin_layout Labeling
20105 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20107 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20110 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20114 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20118 \begin_inset space ~
20122 \begin_inset space ~
20126 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20130 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20138 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20146 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20154 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20162 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20167 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20172 \begin_layout Labeling
20173 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20174 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20182 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20188 \begin_inset space ~
20192 \begin_inset space ~
20198 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20206 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20210 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20214 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20218 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20222 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20225 quotation marks (as common, e.
20226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20238 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20244 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20245 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20253 \begin_layout Labeling
20254 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20255 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20263 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20269 \begin_inset space ~
20273 \begin_inset space ~
20279 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20287 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20291 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20295 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20299 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20303 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20306 quotation marks (as common, e.
20307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20310 g., in North Korea and China)
20311 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20313 \begin_inset script superscript
20315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20320 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20335 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20342 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20352 \begin_layout Standard
20353 Inner quotation marks
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20359 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20360 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20368 does not necessarily mean
20369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20377 This is why we call them
20378 \begin_inset Quotes els
20382 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20398 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20400 \begin_inset Quotes els
20404 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20407 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20410 arg "quote-insert inner"
20415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20421 \begin_layout Standard
20422 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20423 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20424 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20425 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20426 If you check the setting
20428 Use dynamic quotation marks
20432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20433 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20436 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20437 they appear in a special color).
20438 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20439 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20444 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20447 \begin_layout Standard
20448 Individual quotation marks (i.
20449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20452 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20453 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20457 \begin_layout Subsection
20459 \begin_inset Index idx
20462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 Typography ! Ligatures
20469 \begin_inset Index idx
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20503 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20510 \begin_layout Standard
20511 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20512 print them as single characters.
20513 These groups are known as
20518 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20519 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20521 Here are the standard ligatures:
20524 \begin_layout Itemize
20528 \begin_layout Itemize
20532 \begin_layout Itemize
20536 \begin_layout Itemize
20540 \begin_layout Itemize
20544 \begin_layout Standard
20545 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20548 \begin_layout Standard
20549 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20550 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20558 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20574 To break a ligature, use
20576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20577 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20579 \begin_inset space ~
20586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20597 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20614 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20622 \begin_layout Subsection
20624 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20626 \begin_inset Index idx
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 \begin_layout Standard
20642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20643 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20647 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20650 \begin_layout Description
20652 The name of the game.
20655 \begin_layout Description
20657 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20661 \begin_layout Description
20663 The \SpecialChar TeX
20664 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20668 \begin_layout Description
20669 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20670 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20674 \begin_layout Standard
20675 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20681 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20689 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20690 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20691 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20692 converges to the number
20693 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20696 : The actual version is
20697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20705 , the previous one was
20706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20717 \begin_layout Subsection
20719 \begin_inset Index idx
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 \begin_layout Standard
20732 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20733 space between two words.
20734 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20744 for units use the menu
20746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20747 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20749 \begin_inset space ~
20757 arg "space-insert thin"
20763 \begin_layout Standard
20764 Here is an example to show the differences:
20767 \begin_layout Standard
20768 \begin_inset Tabular
20769 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20770 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20771 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20772 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 \begin_inset space ~
20783 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 space between number and unit
20802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20811 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 half space between number and unit
20836 \begin_layout Subsection
20838 \begin_inset Index idx
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20850 \begin_layout Standard
20851 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20853 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20854 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20855 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20856 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20857 These bits of text became known as
20868 \begin_layout Standard
20869 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20870 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20871 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20872 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20873 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20874 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20875 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20876 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20877 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20878 \begin_inset Newline newline
20886 \begin_inset Newline newline
20894 \begin_inset Newline newline
20897 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20898 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20899 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20901 \begin_inset space ~
20905 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20907 key "latexcompanion"
20913 \begin_inset space ~
20917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20924 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20925 's page break mechanism.
20928 \begin_layout Chapter
20929 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20932 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20939 \begin_layout Standard
20940 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20943 \begin_inset space ~
20949 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20952 \begin_layout Section
20954 \begin_inset Index idx
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20973 \begin_layout Standard
20975 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20978 \begin_layout Description
20981 \begin_inset space ~
20984 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20985 \begin_inset Newline newline
20989 \begin_inset Note Note
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21001 \begin_layout Description
21002 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21003 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21004 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21007 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21008 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21010 \begin_inset space ~
21016 \begin_inset Newline newline
21020 \begin_inset Note Comment
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21033 \begin_layout Description
21035 \begin_inset space ~
21038 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21039 set in the document settings under
21041 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21043 \begin_inset space ~
21049 \begin_inset Newline newline
21053 \begin_inset Newline newline
21057 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21067 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21072 of a comment that appears in the output.
21078 \begin_inset Newline newline
21082 \begin_inset Newline newline
21085 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21088 \begin_layout Standard
21089 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21101 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21104 \begin_layout Section
21106 \begin_inset Index idx
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21118 name "sec:Footnotes"
21125 \begin_layout Standard
21127 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21133 or the toolbar button
21136 arg "footnote-insert"
21148 \begin_inset Graphics
21149 filename clipart/footnote.png
21158 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21159 's representation of your footnote.
21169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21188 label, the box will
21192 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21193 Clicking on the box label again will close
21206 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21207 and click on the footnote
21222 \begin_layout Standard
21223 Here is an example footnote:
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21240 \begin_layout Standard
21241 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21242 position where the footnote box is placed.
21243 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21244 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21245 according to the document class.
21247 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21248 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21254 ey are described in the
21257 \begin_inset space ~
21265 \begin_layout Section
21267 \begin_inset Index idx
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21279 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21286 \begin_layout Standard
21287 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21289 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21293 \begin_inset space ~
21298 or the toolbar button
21301 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21327 appearing within your text.
21328 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21329 's representation of your margin
21338 \begin_layout Standard
21339 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21343 \begin_inset Marginal
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 This is a marginal note.
21356 \begin_layout Standard
21357 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21358 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21359 pages, right on odd pages.
21362 \begin_layout Standard
21363 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21366 \begin_inset space ~
21374 \begin_inset space ~
21382 \begin_layout Section
21383 Graphics and Images
21384 \begin_inset Index idx
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 \begin_inset Index idx
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21406 name "sec:Graphics"
21413 \begin_layout Standard
21414 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21415 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21418 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21427 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21430 \begin_layout Standard
21431 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21436 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21437 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21439 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21440 \begin_inset space ~
21444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21446 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21453 \begin_layout Standard
21458 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21459 of the image in the output.
21460 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21464 \begin_inset space ~
21468 \begin_inset space ~
21477 \begin_inset space ~
21481 \begin_inset space ~
21485 \begin_inset space ~
21490 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21491 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21499 \begin_layout Standard
21503 \begin_inset space ~
21507 \begin_inset space ~
21512 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21513 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21515 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21520 \begin_inset space ~
21525 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21526 with the image size is printed.
21529 \begin_layout Standard
21530 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21531 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21533 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21536 \begin_layout Standard
21538 \begin_inset Graphics
21539 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21547 \begin_layout Standard
21548 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21549 the image into a float, see section
21550 \begin_inset space ~
21554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21556 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21563 \begin_layout Subsection
21565 \begin_inset Index idx
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21577 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21584 \begin_layout Standard
21585 You can insert images in any known file format.
21586 But as we explained in section
21587 \begin_inset space ~
21591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21593 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21597 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21599 therefore uses the program
21603 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21604 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21605 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21606 \begin_inset space ~
21610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21612 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21619 \begin_layout Standard
21620 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21623 \begin_layout Description
21625 \begin_inset space ~
21628 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21629 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21630 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21634 Graphics Interchange Format
21635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21638 (GIF, file extension
21639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21651 \begin_inset Index idx
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21686 Portable Network Graphics
21687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21690 (PNG, file extension
21691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21703 \begin_inset Index idx
21706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21738 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21742 (JPG, file extension
21743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21767 \begin_inset Index idx
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 \begin_layout Description
21803 \begin_inset space ~
21806 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21808 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21809 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21810 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21811 \begin_inset Newline newline
21814 Scalable image formats can be
21815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21818 Scalable Vector Graphics
21819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21822 (SVG, file extension
21823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21835 \begin_inset Index idx
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21870 Encapsulated PostScript
21871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21874 (EPS, file extension
21875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21887 \begin_inset Index idx
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21922 Portable Document Format
21923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21926 (PDF, file extension
21927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21939 \begin_inset Index idx
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21957 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21958 result will not be scalable.
21959 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21973 \begin_layout Standard
21974 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21981 \begin_layout Subsection
21982 Grouping of Image Settings
21983 \begin_inset Index idx
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21987 Images ! Settings grouping
21995 \begin_layout Standard
21996 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21998 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21999 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22001 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22002 need to manually change each of them.
22005 \begin_layout Standard
22006 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22009 \begin_inset space ~
22013 \begin_inset space ~
22025 \begin_inset space ~
22029 \begin_inset space ~
22035 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22036 and checking the name of the desired group.
22039 \begin_layout Section
22041 \begin_inset Index idx
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22060 \begin_layout Standard
22061 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22064 arg "tabular-insert"
22069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22073 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22074 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22075 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22078 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22079 from the rest of the table.
22080 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22081 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22083 Here is an example table:
22086 \begin_layout Standard
22088 \begin_inset Tabular
22089 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22090 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22091 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22092 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22292 \begin_layout Standard
22294 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22295 This corresponds to the
22296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22303 table style listed in the style selection.
22306 \begin_layout Standard
22308 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22309 Other available styles include:
22312 \begin_layout Itemize
22314 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22323 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22327 \begin_layout Itemize
22329 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22330 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22333 \begin_layout Itemize
22335 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22344 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22345 bold top/bottom lines (see
22356 \begin_layout Standard
22358 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22359 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22360 button can be changed in
22362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22367 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22371 \begin_layout Subsection
22375 \begin_layout Standard
22376 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22379 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22383 This brings up the table dialog.
22384 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22385 cursor is placed currently.
22386 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22387 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22388 done on all of your selection.
22391 \begin_layout Standard
22392 In addition to the table dialog, the
22395 \begin_inset space ~
22400 helps you in setting table properties.
22401 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22404 \begin_layout Standard
22408 \begin_inset space ~
22413 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22414 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22415 current cell respectively.
22416 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22418 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22419 of text, see section
22420 \begin_inset space ~
22424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22426 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22433 \begin_layout Standard
22434 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22435 using the check box
22444 This will merge the cells to
22448 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22449 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22450 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22451 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22452 in the last row without the upper border:
22455 \begin_layout Standard
22457 \begin_inset Tabular
22458 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22459 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22460 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22461 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22462 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22463 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 \begin_layout Standard
22595 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22596 -arguments for the table.
22597 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22598 explained in the chapter
22605 \begin_inset space ~
22611 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22612 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22613 but are visible in the output.
22616 \begin_layout Standard
22617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22625 Most DVI-viewers are
22629 able to display rotations.
22637 \begin_layout Standard
22642 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22647 adds lines for all cell borders.
22650 \begin_layout Subsection
22652 \begin_inset Index idx
22655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 Tables ! Multi-page
22662 \begin_inset Index idx
22665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 \begin_layout Standard
22675 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22678 \begin_inset space ~
22682 \begin_inset space ~
22690 \begin_inset space ~
22695 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22696 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22699 \begin_layout Description
22704 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22705 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22706 Except for the first page, if
22709 \begin_inset space ~
22717 \begin_layout Description
22721 \begin_inset space ~
22726 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22727 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22730 \begin_layout Description
22735 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22736 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22737 except for the last page, if
22740 \begin_inset space ~
22748 \begin_layout Description
22752 \begin_inset space ~
22757 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22758 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22761 \begin_layout Description
22762 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22763 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22769 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22772 \begin_inset space ~
22780 \begin_layout Standard
22781 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22782 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22783 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22789 In this context, first means first in this order:
22792 \begin_inset space ~
22804 \begin_inset space ~
22809 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22812 \begin_layout Standard
22814 \begin_inset Tabular
22815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22816 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22817 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22818 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22819 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22820 <row endfirsthead="true">
22821 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22827 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22832 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <row endfirsthead="true">
22852 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22863 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 <row endhead="true">
22885 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22905 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22915 <row endhead="true">
22916 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22936 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22948 <row endfoot="true">
22949 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23000 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24063 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24342 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24404 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24528 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24590 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24652 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24745 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24776 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24807 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24838 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24869 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24930 <row endlastfoot="true">
24931 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24942 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24951 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 \begin_layout Subsection
24970 \begin_inset Index idx
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24982 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24989 \begin_layout Standard
24990 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24991 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24992 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24993 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24997 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25000 \begin_layout Standard
25001 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25002 for the column in the table dialog.
25003 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25004 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25008 \begin_layout Standard
25010 \begin_inset Tabular
25011 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25012 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25013 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25014 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25015 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25035 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25104 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 This is longer now.
25165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25217 This is longer now.
25222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 \begin_layout Standard
25249 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25250 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25256 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25261 Selection with the mouse or with
25265 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25266 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25267 the selection from outside the table.
25270 \begin_layout Section
25272 \begin_inset Index idx
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25291 \begin_layout Subsection
25295 \begin_layout Standard
25296 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25297 have a fixed location.
25299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25306 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25314 \begin_inset space ~
25319 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25320 too many notes on the current page.
25323 \begin_layout Standard
25324 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25325 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25326 and pages without text.
25327 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25328 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25329 Floats are therefore numbered.
25330 Referencing is described in section
25331 \begin_inset space ~
25335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25337 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25344 \begin_layout Standard
25345 To insert a float, use the menu
25347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25351 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25352 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25354 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25355 \begin_inset Index idx
25358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25365 paragraph within the float.
25366 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25367 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25368 left-clicking on the box label.
25369 A closed float box looks like this:
25370 \begin_inset Graphics
25371 filename clipart/float.png
25376 – a gray button with a red label.
25379 \begin_layout Standard
25380 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25382 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25385 \begin_layout Subsection
25387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25389 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25394 \begin_inset Index idx
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25398 Floats ! Figure floats
25406 \begin_layout Standard
25408 \begin_inset space ~
25412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25414 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25418 was created using the menu
25420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25421 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25427 arg "float-insert figure"
25431 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25434 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25440 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25444 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25445 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25447 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25449 \begin_inset space ~
25457 arg "layout-paragraph"
25463 \begin_layout Standard
25464 \begin_inset Float figure
25471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25473 \begin_inset Graphics
25474 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25484 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25489 name "fig:A-star-in"
25506 \begin_layout Standard
25507 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25508 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25519 ) and refer to it using the menu
25521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25527 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25531 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25532 vague references like
25533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25540 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25541 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25551 For more about cross-references, see section
25552 \begin_inset space ~
25556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25558 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25567 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25568 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25569 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25570 as described in section
25571 \begin_inset space ~
25575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25577 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25583 \begin_inset space ~
25587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25589 reference "fig:Two-images"
25593 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25594 You can also set the images one below the other.
25596 \begin_inset space ~
25600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25602 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25609 reference "fig:Star"
25613 are the subfigures.
25616 \begin_layout Standard
25617 \begin_inset Float figure
25624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25625 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25629 \begin_inset Float figure
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25637 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25642 name "fig:Undefinable"
25654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25655 \begin_inset Graphics
25656 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25668 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25672 \begin_inset Float figure
25679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25680 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25698 \begin_inset Graphics
25699 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25711 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25718 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25723 name "fig:Two-images"
25740 \begin_layout Subsection
25742 \begin_inset Index idx
25745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25746 Floats ! Table floats
25754 \begin_layout Standard
25755 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25757 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25758 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25761 or the toolbar button
25764 arg "float-insert table"
25768 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25769 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25770 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25772 \begin_inset space ~
25776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25778 reference "tab:Table-float"
25785 \begin_layout Standard
25786 \begin_inset Float table
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25794 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25799 name "tab:Table-float"
25811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25813 \begin_inset Tabular
25814 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25815 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25945 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25966 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25969 \end{array}\right]$
25977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25990 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26011 \begin_layout Subsection
26013 \begin_inset Index idx
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 \begin_layout Standard
26027 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26028 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26029 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26031 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26039 \begin_inset space ~
26047 \begin_layout Section
26049 \begin_inset Index idx
26052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26061 \begin_layout Standard
26063 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26065 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26066 \begin_inset space \space{}
26072 \begin_layout Standard
26073 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26074 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26080 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26081 and its alignment within the page.
26084 \begin_layout Standard
26086 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26096 height_special "totalheight"
26101 backgroundcolor "none"
26104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26107 This is a minipage.
26108 The text is set in an italic style.
26111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26114 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26115 another formatting.
26123 \begin_layout Standard
26124 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26127 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26131 as described in section
26132 \begin_inset space ~
26136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26138 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26143 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26149 \begin_layout Standard
26150 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26160 height_special "totalheight"
26165 backgroundcolor "none"
26168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26169 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26170 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26176 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26180 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26190 height_special "totalheight"
26195 backgroundcolor "none"
26198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26199 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26200 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26208 \begin_layout Standard
26209 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26215 \begin_layout Standard
26216 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26218 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26233 \begin_layout Chapter
26234 Mathematical Formulas
26235 \begin_inset Index idx
26238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26245 \begin_inset Index idx
26248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26279 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26286 \begin_layout Standard
26287 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26292 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26295 \begin_layout Section
26297 \begin_inset Index idx
26300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26309 \begin_layout Standard
26310 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26323 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26325 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26326 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26327 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26329 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26335 \begin_layout Standard
26336 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26340 \begin_inset space ~
26345 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26348 \begin_layout Standard
26349 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26350 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26353 \begin_layout Standard
26354 This is a line with an inline formula
26355 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26361 \begin_layout Standard
26362 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26363 paragraph, like this one:
26364 \begin_inset Formula
26371 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26376 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26378 For example, typing
26379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26392 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26393 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26397 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26400 \begin_inset space ~
26408 \begin_layout Subsection
26409 Navigating in Formulas
26410 \begin_inset Index idx
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26424 achieved with the arrow keys.
26426 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26427 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26432 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26433 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26437 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26441 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26444 \end{array}\right]$
26452 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26457 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26458 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26461 \begin_layout Standard
26466 , printed in this document as
26467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26471 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26478 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26479 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26480 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26485 For example, if you want
26486 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26494 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26504 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26508 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26513 , since in the latter case only the
26516 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26521 will be under the square root sign:
26522 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26528 \begin_layout Standard
26529 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26531 \begin_inset Formula
26533 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26542 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26543 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26546 \begin_layout Subsection
26550 \begin_layout Standard
26551 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26552 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26556 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26557 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26558 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26559 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26560 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26564 \begin_layout Subsection
26565 Exponents and Subscripts
26566 \begin_inset Index idx
26569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26576 \begin_inset Index idx
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26588 \begin_layout Standard
26589 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26592 arg "math-superscript"
26598 arg "math-subscript"
26601 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26603 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26606 , type in a formula
26609 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26619 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26625 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26629 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26635 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26641 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26650 , you have to use an extra
26654 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26655 For example, if you want
26656 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26662 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26668 Subscripts are similar: To get
26669 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26675 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26683 \begin_layout Subsection
26685 \begin_inset Index idx
26688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26697 \begin_layout Standard
26698 Create a fraction either with the command
26704 or by using the icon
26707 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26713 \begin_inset space ~
26719 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26720 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26721 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26726 To move back up, press
26731 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26732 \begin_inset Formula
26734 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26737 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26745 \begin_layout Subsection
26747 \begin_inset Index idx
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 \begin_layout Standard
26760 Roots can be created using the
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26771 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26777 arg "math-insert \\root"
26799 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26805 always produces a square root.
26808 \begin_layout Subsection
26809 Operators with Limits
26810 \begin_inset Index idx
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26820 \begin_inset Index idx
26823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26832 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26839 \begin_layout Standard
26841 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26845 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26848 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26849 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26850 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26851 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26852 The sum operator will automatically place its
26853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26860 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26862 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26866 \begin_inset Formula
26868 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26873 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26877 \begin_layout Standard
26878 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26880 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26881 behind the operator and using the menu
26883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26884 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26886 \begin_inset space ~
26890 \begin_inset space ~
26904 \begin_layout Standard
26905 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26914 \begin_inset Index idx
26917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26924 \begin_inset Formula
26926 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26931 which will place the
26932 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26944 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26945 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26952 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26959 Have a look at section
26960 \begin_inset space ~
26964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26966 reference "subsec:Functions"
26970 for an explanation of function macros.
26973 \begin_layout Subsection
26975 \begin_inset Index idx
26978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26988 Most math symbols can be found in the
26991 \begin_inset space ~
26996 under one of several categories; including
27013 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27017 \begin_layout Standard
27018 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27019 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27020 don't have to use the
27023 \begin_inset space ~
27028 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27030 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27033 \begin_layout Subsection
27035 \begin_inset Index idx
27038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27047 \begin_layout Standard
27048 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27054 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27060 \begin_inset space ~
27068 arg "math-insert \\space"
27072 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27073 For example, the sequence
27078 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27081 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27083 \begin_inset Graphics
27084 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27089 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27090 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27091 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27092 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27093 , because they are negative
27095 Here are two examples:
27098 \begin_layout Standard
27108 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27124 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27130 \begin_layout Subsection
27132 \begin_inset Index idx
27135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27144 name "subsec:Functions"
27151 \begin_layout Standard
27155 \begin_inset space ~
27160 contains under the button
27163 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27166 a number of function macros, such as
27167 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27171 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27179 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27186 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27187 avoid confusions, because
27188 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27192 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27198 \begin_layout Standard
27199 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27201 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27205 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27211 \begin_layout Standard
27212 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27213 are placed, as described in section
27214 \begin_inset space ~
27218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27220 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27227 \begin_layout Subsection
27229 \begin_inset Index idx
27232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27241 \begin_layout Standard
27242 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27244 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27245 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27246 commands, for example, to enter
27247 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27250 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27251 Our example is entered by typing
27256 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27263 \begin_inset space ~
27267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27269 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27273 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27276 \begin_layout Standard
27277 \begin_inset Float table
27284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27285 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27290 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27294 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27304 \begin_inset Tabular
27305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27306 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27393 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27501 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27555 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27609 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27663 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27717 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27825 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27870 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27891 \begin_layout Standard
27892 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27895 \begin_inset space ~
27903 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27906 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27910 \begin_layout Section
27911 Brackets and Delimiters
27912 \begin_inset Index idx
27915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 \begin_inset Index idx
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27934 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27941 \begin_layout Standard
27942 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27944 For some purposes, using just the keys
27949 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27950 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27951 toolbar delimiter icon
27954 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27958 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27959 \begin_inset Formula
27961 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27969 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27970 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27974 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27977 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27983 \begin_inset Formula
27985 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27993 \begin_layout Standard
27994 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27995 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27999 \begin_layout Standard
28000 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28001 left side and right side.
28002 If you use the option
28005 \begin_inset space ~
28010 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28011 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28013 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28018 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28019 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28022 \begin_layout Standard
28023 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28024 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28025 is to go inside the brackets.
28026 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28031 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28032 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28033 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28037 arg "math-delim ( )"
28043 \begin_layout Section
28044 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28045 \begin_inset Index idx
28048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28055 \begin_inset Index idx
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28065 \begin_inset Index idx
28068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28077 \begin_layout Standard
28078 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28082 \begin_inset space ~
28090 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28094 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28095 Here is an example:
28096 \begin_inset Formula
28098 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28107 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28108 \begin_inset space ~
28112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28114 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28119 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28120 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28121 This alignment is set in the box
28126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28175 for every column as default.
28176 For example, the sequence
28177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28188 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28189 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28190 corresponds to the relevant column.
28191 The result will look like this:
28192 \begin_inset Formula
28195 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28196 column & has & has\,right\\
28197 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28206 \begin_layout Standard
28207 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28210 arg "newline-insert newline"
28213 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28214 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28216 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28219 or the math toolbar.
28222 \begin_layout Standard
28223 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28224 It can be created with the menu
28226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28227 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28229 \begin_inset space ~
28241 Here is an example:
28242 \begin_inset Formula
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28257 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28260 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28263 arg "newline-insert newline"
28267 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28272 arg "newline-insert newline"
28275 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28283 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28284 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28285 A new row is created by every further entry of
28288 arg "newline-insert newline"
28292 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28293 Here is an example:
28294 \begin_inset Formula
28296 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28297 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28302 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28303 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28304 \begin_inset Formula
28306 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28315 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28322 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28323 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28326 reference "eq:asquared"
28331 The other types are described in section
28332 \begin_inset space ~
28336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28338 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28345 \begin_layout Section
28346 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28347 \begin_inset Index idx
28350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28351 Math ! Formula numbering
28357 \begin_inset Index idx
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 Math ! Referencing formulas
28367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28369 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28376 \begin_layout Standard
28377 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28380 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28382 \begin_inset space ~
28386 \begin_inset space ~
28394 arg "math-number-toggle"
28398 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28399 within parentheses.
28400 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28401 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28402 the document class.
28403 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28404 separated by a dot:
28405 \begin_inset Formula
28415 arg "math-number-toggle"
28418 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28419 You can only number displayed formulas.
28422 \begin_layout Standard
28423 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28426 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28428 \begin_inset space ~
28432 \begin_inset space ~
28440 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28443 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28444 \begin_inset Formula
28447 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28453 To number all lines use the shortcut
28456 arg "math-number-toggle"
28462 \begin_layout Standard
28463 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28466 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28467 A label is inserted with the menu
28469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28478 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28479 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28480 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28492 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28493 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28494 We inserted in the following example the label
28495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28502 in the second line:
28503 \begin_inset Formula
28505 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28506 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28511 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28512 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28513 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28517 \begin_inset space ~
28525 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28529 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28530 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28531 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28532 as the formula number:
28535 \begin_layout Standard
28536 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28539 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28546 \begin_layout Standard
28547 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28548 's cross-reference box are described in section
28549 \begin_inset space ~
28553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28555 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28560 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28568 \begin_layout Section
28569 User defined math macros
28570 \begin_inset Index idx
28573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28582 \begin_layout Standard
28584 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28585 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28586 Math macros are explained in section
28589 \begin_inset space ~
28601 \begin_layout Section
28605 \begin_layout Subsection
28607 \begin_inset Index idx
28610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28619 \begin_layout Standard
28620 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28621 To set a font in a formula, use the
28624 \begin_inset space ~
28632 arg "math-insert \\font"
28635 , or enter its command, listed in table
28636 \begin_inset space ~
28640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28642 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 \begin_inset Float table
28657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28658 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28663 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28667 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28677 \begin_inset Tabular
28678 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28679 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28713 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28740 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28767 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28800 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28827 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28849 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28855 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28856 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28869 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28885 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28919 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28947 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28955 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28968 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28984 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29018 \begin_layout Standard
29019 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29027 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29030 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29032 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29036 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29055 \begin_layout Standard
29056 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29057 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29062 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29063 space when you need a space in the box.
29064 Here is an example where
29065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29076 denotes the set of numbers:
29077 \begin_inset Formula
29079 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29087 \begin_layout Standard
29088 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29089 You can, for example, put a character in
29098 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29102 \begin_inset Newline newline
29105 So it is better not to use this feature.
29108 \begin_layout Standard
29109 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29110 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29114 \begin_inset Newline newline
29117 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29123 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29124 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29130 \begin_layout Standard
29137 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29140 \begin_layout Standard
29141 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29143 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29144 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29146 \begin_inset space ~
29154 \begin_layout Subsection
29156 \begin_inset Index idx
29159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29168 \begin_layout Standard
29169 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29171 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29175 \begin_inset space ~
29179 \begin_inset space ~
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29195 arg "math-insert \\font"
29199 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29200 in black instead of blue.
29201 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29202 Here is an example:
29203 \begin_inset Formula
29206 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29207 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29216 \begin_layout Subsection
29218 \begin_inset Index idx
29221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 \begin_layout Standard
29231 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29232 automatically chosen in most situations.
29250 For most characters,
29258 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29259 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29264 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29265 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29266 thinks are appropriate.
29267 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29270 arg "math-insert \\style"
29274 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29275 For example, you can set
29276 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29279 , which is normally in
29288 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29292 The four styles are used in the following example:
29295 \begin_layout Standard
29296 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29300 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29304 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29308 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29315 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29316 is set in a particular size with the menu
29318 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29320 \begin_inset space ~
29325 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29326 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29327 will be adjusted to correspond.
29328 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29339 \begin_layout Standard
29343 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29349 \begin_layout Section
29350 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29352 \begin_inset Index idx
29355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29362 \begin_inset Index idx
29365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29374 \begin_layout Standard
29376 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29377 that are in common use.
29380 \begin_layout Subsection
29381 Enabling AMS-Support
29384 \begin_layout Standard
29385 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29387 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29403 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29404 selecting the checkbox
29407 \begin_inset space ~
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29415 \begin_inset space ~
29424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29428 \begin_inset Index idx
29431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29432 Document ! Settings
29440 \begin_inset space ~
29446 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29447 -errors in formulas,
29448 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29451 \begin_layout Subsection
29453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29455 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29460 \begin_inset Index idx
29463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29464 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29472 \begin_layout Standard
29473 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29474 provides a selection of different formula types.
29476 allows you to choose between
29497 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29498 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29505 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29508 \begin_layout Chapter
29512 \begin_layout Section
29514 \begin_inset Index idx
29517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29526 name "sec:Cross-References"
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29534 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29535 's strengths is cross-references.
29536 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29538 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29539 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29540 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29543 \begin_layout Enumerate
29547 \begin_layout Enumerate
29548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29550 name "enu:Second-item"
29557 \begin_layout Enumerate
29561 \begin_layout Standard
29562 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29567 or by pressing the toolbar button
29574 A gray label box like this:
29575 \begin_inset Graphics
29576 filename clipart/label.png
29580 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29582 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29617 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29618 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29635 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29637 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29640 or the toolbar button
29643 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29647 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29648 \begin_inset Graphics
29649 filename clipart/reference.png
29653 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29655 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29668 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29672 \begin_layout Standard
29673 As an alternative to
29675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29678 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29683 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29684 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29686 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29699 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29700 \begin_inset space ~
29704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29706 reference "enu:Second-item"
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29714 It is recommended to use a protected space
29718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29719 described in section
29720 \begin_inset space ~
29724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29726 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29735 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29736 line breaks between them.
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29743 \begin_layout Description
29744 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29747 reference "fig:Two-images"
29754 \begin_layout Description
29755 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29756 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29768 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29775 \begin_layout Description
29776 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29777 \begin_inset space ~
29781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29782 LatexCommand pageref
29783 reference "fig:Two-images"
29790 \begin_layout Description
29792 \begin_inset space ~
29796 \begin_inset space ~
29799 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29801 LatexCommand vpageref
29802 reference "fig:Two-images"
29807 \begin_inset Newline newline
29810 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29811 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29812 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29813 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29814 it prints “on the next page”.
29815 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29818 \begin_layout Description
29820 \begin_inset space ~
29824 \begin_inset space ~
29828 \begin_inset space ~
29831 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29834 reference "fig:Two-images"
29839 \begin_inset Newline newline
29842 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29848 ; otherwise it behaves like
29852 \begin_inset space ~
29856 \begin_inset space ~
29865 \begin_layout Description
29867 \begin_inset space ~
29870 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29871 \begin_inset Newline newline
29875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29883 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29893 \begin_inset Index idx
29896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29898 packages ! prettyref
29904 \begin_inset Index idx
29907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29909 packages ! refstyle
29920 \begin_inset Newline newline
29923 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29924 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29927 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29932 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29940 is the default and preferred because
29944 supports only English documents.
29945 The format is specified by using the command
29949 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29958 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29959 preamble of the document.
29960 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29978 \begin_inset Newline newline
29985 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29990 \begin_inset Newline newline
30001 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30002 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30004 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30005 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30010 , you might do so as follows:
30011 \begin_inset Newline newline
30018 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30019 format{prop}{Proposition
30024 \begin_inset Newline newline
30027 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30028 the package documentation
30029 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30031 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30037 \begin_inset Newline newline
30048 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30055 \begin_layout Description
30057 \begin_inset space ~
30060 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30062 LatexCommand nameref
30063 reference "fig:Two-images"
30070 \begin_layout Description
30072 \begin_inset space ~
30075 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30076 label for the reference:
30077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30078 LatexCommand labelonly
30079 reference "fig:Two-images"
30084 \begin_inset Newline newline
30087 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30088 Code, if you want to issue a command
30089 that \SpecialChar LyX
30095 , then you may want to use the
30098 \begin_inset space ~
30103 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30113 This is the form needed for e.
30114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30118 \begin_inset space \space{}
30125 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30126 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30128 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30132 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 You can only use the style
30141 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30145 is always possible.
30148 \begin_layout Standard
30149 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30150 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30152 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30153 \begin_inset space ~
30157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30159 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30166 \begin_layout Standard
30167 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30171 \begin_inset space ~
30175 \begin_inset space ~
30180 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30181 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30182 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30185 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30188 \begin_inset space ~
30193 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30194 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30197 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30201 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30202 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30203 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30210 You can change labels at any time.
30211 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30213 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30215 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30216 change them all manually
30221 \begin_layout Standard
30222 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30224 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30228 \begin_layout Standard
30229 References are described in detail in the section
30240 \begin_layout Section
30241 Table of Contents and other Listings
30242 \begin_inset Index idx
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 \begin_inset Index idx
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30256 Navigating ! Outline
30262 \begin_inset Index idx
30265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30281 \begin_layout Subsection
30283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30285 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30292 \begin_layout Standard
30293 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30296 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30298 \begin_inset space ~
30302 \begin_inset space ~
30308 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30310 If you click on it, the
30314 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30315 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30316 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30318 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30320 \begin_inset space ~
30325 that is described in section
30326 \begin_inset space ~
30330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30332 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30339 \begin_layout Standard
30340 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30341 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30343 \begin_inset space ~
30347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30349 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30353 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30355 \begin_inset space ~
30359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30361 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30365 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30367 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30370 \begin_layout Subsection
30371 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30374 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30381 \begin_layout Standard
30382 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30384 You can insert them via the
30386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30387 List/Contents/References
30390 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30393 \begin_layout Section
30394 URLs and Hyperlinks
30395 \begin_inset Index idx
30398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30405 \begin_inset Index idx
30408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30417 \begin_layout Subsection
30419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30429 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30437 \begin_layout Standard
30438 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30440 \begin_inset Flex URL
30443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30445 https://www.lyx.org
30453 \begin_layout Standard
30454 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30460 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30465 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30473 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30482 \begin_layout Subsection
30484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30486 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30494 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30499 or with the toolbar button
30506 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30515 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30516 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30517 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30519 name "LyX's homepage"
30520 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30525 , an Email address like this:
30526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30528 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30529 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30535 , or a link to a file.
30540 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30549 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30562 to the link target.
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30566 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30567 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30568 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30569 the text style dialog.
30570 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30574 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30576 name "LyX's homepage"
30577 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30586 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30590 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30593 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30597 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30599 \begin_inset Newline newline
30607 \begin_inset Newline newline
30614 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30615 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30619 \begin_layout Section
30621 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30623 \begin_inset Index idx
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30635 name "sec:Counters"
30642 \begin_layout Standard
30644 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
30645 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30646 is its ability to manage counters.
30647 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30648 modify counters directly.
30649 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30651 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
30655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
30658 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
30659 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
30660 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
30661 to set the section counter to four.
30668 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
30669 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30670 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30671 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30674 \begin_layout Standard
30676 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30677 There are five commands you can use:
30680 \begin_layout Enumerate
30682 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30683 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30686 \begin_layout Enumerate
30688 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30689 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30690 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30693 \begin_layout Enumerate
30695 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30696 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30699 \begin_layout Enumerate
30701 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30702 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30706 \begin_layout Enumerate
30708 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30709 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30712 \begin_layout Standard
30714 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30715 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30716 those that are available in the current document class.
30721 \begin_layout Section
30723 \begin_inset Index idx
30726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30735 name "sec:Appendices"
30742 \begin_layout Standard
30743 Appendices are created with the menu
30745 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30747 \begin_inset space ~
30751 \begin_inset space ~
30757 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30758 as the appendix part of the book.
30759 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30762 \begin_layout Standard
30763 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30764 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30765 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30766 and the subsection number.
30767 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30771 \begin_layout Standard
30773 \begin_inset space ~
30777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30779 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30787 \begin_inset space ~
30791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30793 reference "subsec:Export"
30800 \begin_layout Section
30802 \begin_inset Index idx
30805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30814 name "sec:Bibliography"
30821 \begin_layout Standard
30822 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30824 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30825 \begin_inset space ~
30829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30831 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30838 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30843 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30844 \begin_inset space ~
30848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30850 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30855 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30856 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30857 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30861 using a bibliography database.
30864 \begin_layout Standard
30865 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30866 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30870 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30871 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30872 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30873 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30874 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30877 \begin_layout Subsection
30878 The Bibliography Environment
30879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30881 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30888 \begin_layout Standard
30893 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30895 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30904 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30906 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30907 of ASCII characters only.
30911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30916 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30922 \begin_inset Newline newline
30926 \begin_inset Flex URL
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30941 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30951 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30952 \begin_inset Newline newline
30959 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30960 the number of the entry.
30965 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30980 or the toolbar button
30983 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30987 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30988 containing the available citations.
30989 Select one or more keys from the list and
30999 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31000 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31005 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31006 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31007 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31019 \begin_layout Standard
31023 Companion Second Edition
31026 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31028 key "latexcompanion"
31036 \begin_layout Standard
31037 The \SpecialChar LyX
31038 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31049 \begin_layout Standard
31050 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31057 \begin_inset Index idx
31060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31069 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31070 the label needs to be given the form
31071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31082 Author A and Author B(Year)
31083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31090 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31097 \begin_inset space ~
31102 in the document settings
31103 \begin_inset Index idx
31106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31107 Document ! Settings
31114 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31116 \begin_inset space ~
31122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31124 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31132 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31134 Once you have done that, the
31138 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31155 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31156 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31157 These two are madatory.
31158 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31161 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31163 ) and in abrreviated form (
31170 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31171 add the abbreviated form to
31175 and the full list to the optional
31183 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31184 If specified like this,
31186 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31187 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31197 is specified, toggling
31198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31205 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31206 full and abbreviated list
31210 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31211 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31212 the citation references.
31213 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31218 \begin_layout Standard
31219 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31222 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31224 \begin_inset space ~
31232 arg "layout-paragraph"
31236 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31239 \begin_layout Subsection
31240 Bibliography databases
31241 \begin_inset Index idx
31244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31245 Bibliography ! Databases
31251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31253 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31260 \begin_layout Standard
31261 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31267 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31269 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31270 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31275 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31277 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31278 your working field in a database.
31279 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31280 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31281 list for that document.
31282 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31286 \begin_layout Standard
31287 The database is a text file with the file extension
31288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31299 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31300 The format is explained in
31301 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31308 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31310 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31312 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31318 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31319 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31320 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31322 \begin_inset Flex URL
31325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31327 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31335 \begin_layout Standard
31337 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31338 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31339 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31341 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31343 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31344 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31345 Those are addressed by
31350 \begin_inset Index idx
31353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31355 packages ! biblatex
31361 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31362 (although it has been significantly
31363 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31373 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31374 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31375 might conversely fail to correctly
31376 handle databases that use specific
31385 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31389 \begin_layout Standard
31390 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31395 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31401 \begin_inset Index idx
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31405 Document ! Settings
31417 \begin_inset space ~
31422 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31431 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31433 \begin_inset Index idx
31436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31437 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31446 \begin_layout Standard
31447 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31451 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31453 \begin_inset space ~
31459 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31460 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31468 Add bibliography to TOC
31470 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31475 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31476 in the document or just the cited references.
31478 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31483 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31484 differ from the encoding of the document.
31489 \begin_layout Standard
31490 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31491 style file is a text file with the file extension
31492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31503 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31504 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31505 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31506 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31508 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31514 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31515 \begin_inset Newline newline
31519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31521 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31531 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31536 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31540 \begin_layout Standard
31541 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31546 \begin_inset Index idx
31549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31550 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31556 \begin_inset Index idx
31559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31561 packages ! biblatex
31569 \begin_layout Standard
31570 Accessing a database via
31574 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31578 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31580 \begin_inset space ~
31586 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31587 you cannot select a
31592 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31596 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31599 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31600 As for the styles, note the following.
31605 \begin_layout Standard
31610 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31623 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31624 file (text file with the file extension
31625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31636 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31637 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31639 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31643 \begin_layout Standard
31648 styles are not set in the
31651 \begin_inset space ~
31656 dialog, but in the document settings.
31657 \begin_inset Index idx
31660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31661 Document ! Settings
31666 However, in the dialog in the
31670 field, which is only visible if you use
31674 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31675 example how its heading will appear).
31676 These options are described in detail in the
31681 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31691 \begin_layout Standard
31692 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31693 \begin_inset space ~
31697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31699 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31710 Bibliography Processors
31713 \begin_layout Standard
31714 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31715 uses a bibliography processor,
31716 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31717 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31718 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31720 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31721 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31725 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31727 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31728 You can do this on a general level in
31730 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31731 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31732 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31735 or for individual documents in
31737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31738 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31742 The following variants are available by default:
31745 \begin_layout Description
31746 biber a specific, modern processor
31747 \begin_inset Index idx
31750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31757 developed exclusively for
31761 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31767 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31772 makes use of; if you use the
31776 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31783 \begin_layout Description
31784 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31785 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31786 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31790 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31793 \begin_layout Description
31794 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31795 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31799 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31803 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31807 features are supported.
31810 \begin_layout Standard
31811 By default (with the
31817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31818 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31831 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31832 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31833 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31836 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31837 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31850 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31851 -based bibliography styles).
31852 This should suit most needs.
31855 \begin_layout Standard
31856 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31857 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31858 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31863 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31864 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31865 You can adjust it in
31867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31868 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31869 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31875 \begin_layout Standard
31876 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31877 can add below the selection.
31878 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31879 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31901 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31903 These are explained in detail in section
31905 Customizing Bibliographies
31909 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31914 Additional Features
31917 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31921 \begin_layout Subsection
31923 \begin_inset Index idx
31926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31927 Bibliography ! Citation format
31933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31935 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31943 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31948 \begin_inset space \space{}
31951 numerical citation (as
31952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31959 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31967 ) or author-year citations (as
31968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31977 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31981 \begin_layout Standard
31982 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31986 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31990 \begin_inset Index idx
31993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31994 Document ! Settings
31999 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32005 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32006 labels, is there to use
32009 \begin_inset space ~
32020 \begin_inset space ~
32025 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32028 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 With a bibliography database (see
32037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32039 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32046 ) one has in contrary to the
32050 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32051 These style formats are available:
32054 \begin_layout Description
32056 \begin_inset space ~
32059 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32060 -based approached without any additional packages
32061 (simple numeric citations).
32064 \begin_layout Description
32065 Biblatex loads the package
32070 \begin_inset Index idx
32073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32075 packages ! biblatex
32080 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32082 Biblatex citation style
32086 Biblatex bibliography style
32089 Options to the package
32093 can be entered in the
32100 \begin_layout Description
32102 \begin_inset space ~
32106 \begin_inset space ~
32109 mode) loads the package
32113 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32114 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32126 behavior very closely.
32131 this option has some additional styles.
32136 styles are also supported by this variant.
32139 \begin_layout Description
32141 \begin_inset space ~
32144 (BibTeX) loads the package
32149 \begin_inset Index idx
32152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32159 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32162 \begin_layout Description
32164 \begin_inset space ~
32167 (BibTeX) loads the package
32172 \begin_inset Index idx
32175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32182 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32185 \begin_layout Standard
32194 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32196 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32205 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32207 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32208 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32210 Biblatex citation style
32213 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32219 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32225 are available in the
32230 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32231 a name prefix such as
32232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32247 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32252 \begin_inset space \space{}
32256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32268 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32274 \begin_inset space \space{}
32277 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32283 \begin_inset space \space{}
32287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32299 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32303 \begin_inset space ~
32311 \begin_inset space ~
32317 Here is a simple example where the text
32318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32322 \begin_inset space ~
32326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32329 appears after the reference:
32332 \begin_layout Quote
32334 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32337 key "latexcompanion"
32345 \begin_layout Standard
32346 All styles except for
32350 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32360 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32364 \begin_layout Standard
32365 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32366 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32367 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32372 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32373 multi-citation (so-called
32374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32377 qualified citation lists
32378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32384 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32389 dialog will display three columns in the field
32396 \begin_inset space ~
32404 \begin_inset space ~
32412 \begin_inset space ~
32418 If you double-click on an item's
32421 \begin_inset space ~
32429 \begin_inset space ~
32434 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32437 General text before
32443 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32446 \begin_layout Subsection
32448 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32451 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32455 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32459 \begin_layout Standard
32461 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32463 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32466 \begin_inset space ~
32470 \begin_inset space ~
32474 \begin_inset space ~
32478 \begin_inset space ~
32481 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32484 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32487 \begin_layout Itemize
32489 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32490 If citation entries include any of the fields
32491 \begin_inset Flex Code
32494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32496 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32505 \begin_inset Flex Code
32508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32510 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32518 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32519 \begin_inset Flex Code
32522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32524 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32532 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32533 \begin_inset Flex Code
32536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32538 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32546 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32549 \begin_layout Itemize
32551 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32552 If citation entries include any of the fields
32553 \begin_inset Flex Code
32556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32558 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32566 (filled by JabRef) or
32567 \begin_inset Flex Code
32570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32572 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32580 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32581 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32582 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32585 \begin_layout Standard
32587 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32588 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32589 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32592 Search drive for cited files
32596 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32597 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32598 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32599 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32603 It uses the tokens supplied at
32607 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32608 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32609 arbitrary position).
32611 opens the first matching file it finds.
32612 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32613 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32614 the chance this works for you.
32619 \begin_layout Standard
32621 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32622 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32623 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32625 \begin_inset Flex Code
32628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32630 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32639 \begin_inset Flex Code
32642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32644 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32652 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32656 Cite format description
32663 \begin_layout Section
32665 \begin_inset Index idx
32668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32684 \begin_layout Standard
32685 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32689 \begin_inset space ~
32694 or the toolbar button
32701 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32702 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32703 by \SpecialChar LyX
32704 as the index entry.
32707 \begin_layout Standard
32708 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32711 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32713 \begin_inset space ~
32719 A light blue box labeled
32720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32731 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32732 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32736 \begin_layout Standard
32737 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32738 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32739 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32740 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32742 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32744 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32752 \begin_layout Subsection
32753 Grouping Index Entries
32754 \begin_inset Index idx
32757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32766 \begin_layout Standard
32767 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32769 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32770 lists under the entry
32771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32779 First we create the entry
32780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32788 \begin_inset space ~
32792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32794 reference "subsec:Lists"
32799 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32800 \begin_inset space ~
32804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32806 reference "sec:Itemize"
32810 , we insert the command
32813 \begin_layout Standard
32819 \begin_layout Standard
32823 \begin_layout Standard
32829 \begin_layout Standard
32830 for the enumerated list in section
32831 \begin_inset space ~
32835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32837 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32844 \begin_layout Standard
32845 The exclamation mark
32846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32853 marks the grouping levels.
32854 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32855 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32856 If we don't have an index entry for
32857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32864 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32867 \begin_layout Subsection
32869 \begin_inset Index idx
32872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32873 Index ! Page ranges
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32882 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32884 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32885 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32886 an index entry in section
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32893 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32900 \begin_layout Standard
32903 Paragraph environments|(
32906 \begin_layout Standard
32907 and another entry at the end of section
32908 \begin_inset space ~
32912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32914 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32921 \begin_layout Standard
32924 Paragraph environments|)
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32952 respectively start and end the index range.
32953 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32954 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32955 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32956 An example is the index entry
32957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32960 Document ! Settings
32961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32967 \begin_layout Subsection
32969 \begin_inset Index idx
32972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32973 Index ! Cross referencing
32981 \begin_layout Standard
32982 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32983 We referred for example in the index entry
32984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32992 \begin_inset space ~
32996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32998 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33002 ) to the index entry
33003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33010 in the same section using the entry
33013 \begin_layout Standard
33016 GIF|see{Image formats}
33019 \begin_layout Standard
33020 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33022 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33023 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33026 \begin_layout Subsection
33028 \begin_inset Index idx
33031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33032 Index ! Entry order
33040 \begin_layout Standard
33041 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33042 follow the rules for the index order.
33043 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33049 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33051 \begin_inset space ~
33055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33057 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33066 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33067 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33092 \begin_inset Index idx
33095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33096 Dummy entries ! maïs
33102 \begin_inset Index idx
33105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33106 Dummy entries ! maître
33112 \begin_inset Index idx
33115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33116 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33121 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33122 maïs, maison, maître.
33123 To achieve this, we use the command
33126 \begin_layout Standard
33129 previous entry@current entry
33132 \begin_layout Standard
33133 In our case we want to have
33134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33149 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33152 \begin_layout Standard
33158 \begin_layout Standard
33159 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33160 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33162 See the next subsection for an example.
33165 \begin_layout Subsection
33167 \begin_inset Index idx
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 Index ! Entry layout
33179 \begin_layout Standard
33180 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33181 \begin_inset Index idx
33184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 This is an italic dummy entry
33192 You can also format the page number using the character
33193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33200 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33201 -command without a backslash.
33202 We can write for example
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33208 italic page number:|textit
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33212 to get the page number in italic.
33213 \begin_inset Index idx
33216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33217 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33222 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33223 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33241 \begin_inset space ~
33247 Have a look at section
33248 \begin_inset space ~
33252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33254 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33258 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33262 \begin_layout Standard
33263 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33271 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33275 to generate the index, see section
33276 \begin_inset space ~
33280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33282 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33291 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33296 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33300 key "latexcompanion"
33313 \begin_layout Standard
33314 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33316 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33317 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33318 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33319 If so, put the following in the preamble
33322 \begin_layout Standard
33334 \begin_layout Standard
33338 \begin_layout Standard
33344 \begin_layout Standard
33345 in the index entry.
33346 \begin_inset Index idx
33349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33350 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33355 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33356 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33357 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33360 \begin_layout Standard
33361 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33362 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33363 a bold font for all index entries.
33364 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33376 documentation for details,
33377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33379 key "makeindex,xindy"
33387 \begin_layout Subsection
33389 \begin_inset Index idx
33392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33401 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33408 \begin_layout Standard
33409 If the index generation program
33413 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33414 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33418 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33419 distribution, is used.
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33428 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33429 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33430 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33431 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33432 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33442 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33444 dialog, see section
33445 \begin_inset space ~
33449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33451 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33456 The available options are listed and explained in
33457 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33459 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33465 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33469 \begin_layout Standard
33470 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33471 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33475 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33479 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33480 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33483 \begin_layout Subsection
33487 \begin_layout Standard
33488 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33489 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33497 next to the standard index.
33499 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33500 that add this feature.
33507 \begin_inset Index idx
33510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33512 packages ! splitidx
33517 package to generate multiple indexes.
33518 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33534 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33535 style, but it also includes
33536 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33537 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33546 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33547 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33549 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33550 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33553 and select the option
33555 Use multiple Indexes
33562 already contains the standard index
33563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33571 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33572 also appear as a heading) to the
33576 input field and press the
33581 The new index now also appears in the list.
33582 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33583 label color to the new index.
33586 \begin_layout Standard
33587 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33591 List/Contents/References
33597 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33598 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33599 are additional features:
33602 \begin_layout Itemize
33603 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33604 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33607 \begin_layout Itemize
33608 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33609 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33614 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33615 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33616 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33617 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33620 \begin_layout Itemize
33625 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33626 code in the name of the index.
33629 \begin_layout Section
33630 Nomenclature/Glossary
33631 \begin_inset Index idx
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33641 \begin_inset Index idx
33644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33675 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33682 \begin_layout Standard
33683 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33684 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33685 called nomenclature or glossary.
33688 \begin_layout Standard
33689 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33696 \begin_inset Index idx
33699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33707 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33709 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33716 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33720 \begin_layout Standard
33721 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33722 and then use the menu
33724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33730 \begin_inset space ~
33735 or the toolbar button
33738 arg "nomencl-insert"
33743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33754 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33759 The first is the term or
33763 that you wish to define.
33768 of the term or symbol.
33771 \begin_layout Standard
33772 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33780 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33781 code for nomenclature entries the option
33785 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33793 \begin_layout Subsection
33794 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33795 \begin_inset Index idx
33798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33799 Nomenclature ! Layout
33807 \begin_layout Standard
33808 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33812 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33819 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33827 \begin_inset Newline newline
33835 \begin_inset Newline newline
33841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33848 character starts/ends the formula.
33849 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33850 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33862 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33873 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33874 syntax is given in section
33875 \begin_inset space ~
33879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33881 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33888 \begin_layout Standard
33892 \begin_inset space ~
33897 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33899 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33904 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33911 in this document is:
33912 \begin_inset Newline newline
33917 dummy entry for the character
33922 \begin_inset Newline newline
33934 \begin_inset space ~
33944 font use the command
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33979 \begin_inset space \space{}
33983 \begin_inset Newline newline
33999 \begin_inset Newline newline
34002 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34003 This command will make the font of all symbols
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34018 \begin_layout Standard
34019 If the characters |
34020 \begin_inset space \space{}
34024 \begin_inset space \space{}
34028 \begin_inset space \space{}
34032 \begin_inset space \space{}
34036 \begin_inset space \space{}
34039 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34040 code they need to be escaped
34041 by adding a quote character in front of them.
34042 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34043 LatexCommand nomenclature
34044 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34045 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34053 \begin_layout Subsection
34054 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34055 \begin_inset Index idx
34058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34059 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34067 \begin_layout Standard
34068 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34069 -code of the symbol
34071 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34073 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34076 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34077 LatexCommand nomenclature
34079 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34087 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34091 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34092 LatexCommand nomenclature
34095 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34101 They will be sorted by
34102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34128 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34131 will be sorted before the
34135 since the character
34136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34143 is considered in sorting.
34146 \begin_layout Standard
34147 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34155 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34156 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34158 For the example given, you can insert
34162 in this field for the
34163 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34170 will be located before
34171 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34177 \begin_layout Standard
34178 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34193 \begin_layout Subsection
34194 Nomenclature Options
34195 \begin_inset Index idx
34198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34199 Nomenclature ! Options
34205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34207 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34214 \begin_layout Standard
34219 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34220 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34223 \begin_layout Description
34224 refeq Appends the phrase
34225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34240 to every nomenclature entry, where
34246 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34249 \begin_layout Description
34250 refpage Appends the phrase
34251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34266 to every nomenclature entry, where
34272 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34275 \begin_layout Description
34276 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34279 \begin_layout Standard
34280 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34281 class options list in the
34283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34287 In this document the options
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34295 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34301 \begin_layout Standard
34302 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34303 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34308 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34311 \begin_layout Description
34321 \begin_layout Description
34324 nomrefpage Like the
34331 \begin_layout Description
34334 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34343 \begin_layout Description
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34358 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34361 \begin_layout Standard
34363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34370 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34371 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34384 \begin_inset Newline newline
34390 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34394 \begin_inset space ~
34406 unskip, see equation
34409 \begin_inset Newline newline
34416 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34417 \begin_inset Newline newline
34423 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34427 \begin_inset space ~
34444 \begin_layout Standard
34445 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34448 \begin_inset space ~
34453 in the document settings under
34456 \begin_inset space ~
34464 \begin_layout Standard
34472 \begin_inset Newline newline
34476 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34480 \begin_inset space ~
34492 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34494 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34495 \begin_inset Newline newline
34502 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34503 \begin_inset Newline newline
34507 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34511 \begin_inset space ~
34523 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34528 \begin_layout Subsection
34529 Printing the Nomenclature
34530 \begin_inset Index idx
34533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34534 Nomenclature ! Printing
34542 \begin_layout Standard
34543 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34546 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34562 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34563 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34564 You can choose between these settings:
34567 \begin_layout Description
34568 Default a space of 1
34569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34575 \begin_layout Description
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34581 \begin_inset space ~
34584 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34587 \begin_layout Description
34588 Custom custom space
34591 \begin_layout Standard
34592 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34601 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34609 For example, in order to change the name to
34613 , add the following line to the preamble:
34616 \begin_layout Standard
34629 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34634 \begin_inset Newline newline
34649 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34652 \begin_layout Subsection
34653 Nomenclature Program
34654 \begin_inset Index idx
34657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34658 Nomenclature ! Program
34664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34666 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34673 \begin_layout Standard
34679 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34680 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34682 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34687 by adding options, see section
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34694 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34699 The available options are listed and explained in
34700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34702 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34710 \begin_layout Section
34712 \begin_inset Index idx
34715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34722 \begin_inset Index idx
34725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34726 Document ! Branches
34732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34734 name "sec:Branches"
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34742 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34743 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34744 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34745 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34748 \begin_layout Standard
34749 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34750 allows you to put text into branches.
34751 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34752 To create a branch, either select the menu
34754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34755 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34758 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34767 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34768 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34769 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34770 and whether the name of the branch should
34771 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34772 (see below for an example).
34773 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34774 to the name of the other) and to add
34775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34790 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34791 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34794 \begin_layout Standard
34795 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34796 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34801 where you can choose a branch.
34802 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34806 \begin_layout Standard
34807 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34808 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34811 \begin_layout Standard
34812 \begin_inset Branch Question
34816 \begin_layout Standard
34821 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34829 \begin_layout Standard
34830 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34839 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34855 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34858 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34859 Consider for example a file
34860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34867 which has the above branches.
34869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34876 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34900 branch were inactive,
34901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34916 branch was active, likewise
34917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34932 branch was active, and
34933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34936 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34940 if both branches were active.
34941 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34942 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34948 \begin_layout Standard
34949 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34955 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34956 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34960 \begin_inset space ~
34968 \begin_layout Standard
34969 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34973 \begin_layout Standard
34979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34986 branch is deactivated.
34992 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34998 \begin_layout Standard
34999 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35000 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35001 definitions for each branch.
35002 For example you can define for the question branch
35006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35007 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35008 -syntax, see section
35009 \begin_inset space ~
35013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35015 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35027 \begin_layout Standard
35037 \begin_layout Standard
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 and for the answer branch
35051 \begin_layout Standard
35061 \begin_layout Standard
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35072 \begin_inset Branch Question
35076 \begin_layout Standard
35080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35108 \begin_layout Standard
35109 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35113 \begin_layout Standard
35117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 Now it is possible to use the
35150 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35157 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35160 commands to obtain conditional output.
35161 Here is an example formula where only the
35168 \begin_inset Formula
35170 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35178 \begin_layout Standard
35179 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35188 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35194 \begin_inset space \space{}
35197 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35199 For this advanced usage, see the
35205 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35210 \begin_layout Section
35212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35214 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35219 \begin_inset Index idx
35222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35231 \begin_layout Standard
35234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35235 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35238 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35240 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35246 \begin_inset Index idx
35249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35251 packages ! hyperref
35256 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35257 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35258 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35259 part of the document.
35262 \begin_layout Standard
35263 The header information in the dialog tab
35267 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35268 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35269 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35270 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35283 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35284 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35285 and author entries.
35289 \begin_inset space ~
35293 \begin_inset space ~
35297 \begin_inset space ~
35302 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35305 \begin_layout Standard
35306 You can specify in the dialog tab
35310 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35319 \begin_inset space ~
35323 \begin_inset space ~
35328 option allows long links to be split;
35331 \begin_inset space ~
35335 \begin_inset space ~
35339 \begin_inset space ~
35347 \begin_inset space ~
35352 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35355 \begin_inset space ~
35360 colors the different links.
35361 The default colors are:
35364 \begin_layout Labeling
35365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35370 for hyperlinks and URLs
35373 \begin_layout Labeling
35374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35382 \begin_layout Labeling
35383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35391 \begin_layout Standard
35392 but you can change these in the field
35397 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35403 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35406 \begin_layout Standard
35411 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35412 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35413 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35416 \begin_layout Standard
35421 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35422 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35423 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35433 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35434 when opening the PDF.
35436 \begin_inset space ~
35439 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35440 \begin_inset space ~
35443 1 will only display the sections.
35446 \begin_layout Standard
35447 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35448 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35454 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35465 \begin_layout Section
35467 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35471 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35478 \begin_layout Subsection
35481 \begin_inset Index idx
35484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35494 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35501 \begin_layout Standard
35502 As \SpecialChar LyX
35503 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35504 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35505 commands and constructs,
35508 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35509 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35510 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35511 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35512 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35513 cannot support all packages and
35517 \begin_layout Standard
35518 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35519 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35520 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35524 Code box is created by the menu
35526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35533 or by the toolbar button
35546 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35557 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35559 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35564 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35569 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35576 , you can write the command part
35582 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35583 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35587 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35588 Code box behind the word.
35589 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35590 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35594 \begin_layout Standard
35595 \begin_inset Graphics
35596 filename clipart/ERT.png
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35608 \begin_layout Standard
35609 This is a line with a
35613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35636 \begin_layout Standard
35637 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35645 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35646 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35647 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35648 know that the command is finished.
35656 \begin_layout Subsection
35657 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35659 \begin_inset Argument 1
35662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35663 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35670 \begin_inset Index idx
35673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35683 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35690 \begin_layout Standard
35691 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35692 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35693 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35694 uses in the background.
35695 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35696 is based on commands, you can
35697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35705 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35706 any time if you know the right commands.
35707 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35708 is the end of the day.
35709 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35710 all caption labels bold.
35711 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35713 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35717 \begin_layout Standard
35718 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35720 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35722 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35735 \begin_layout Standard
35736 As result you find that the package
35741 \begin_inset Index idx
35744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35752 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35757 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35761 \begin_inset space ~
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35774 usepackage[options]{package name}
35777 \begin_layout Standard
35778 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35779 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35780 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35781 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35784 \begin_layout Standard
35785 In your case the package name is
35790 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35795 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35796 So you add the command
35799 \begin_layout Standard
35804 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35807 \begin_layout Standard
35808 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 For more commands provided by the
35817 package, have a look at its documentation,
35818 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35833 \begin_layout Standard
35834 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35836 For example if you use a
35840 class, you don't need the package
35844 , you can instead write
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35852 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35857 \begin_layout Standard
35858 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35859 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35860 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35867 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35870 \begin_layout Standard
35871 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35872 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35874 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35875 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35876 Code box as described in the previous
35880 \begin_layout Standard
35881 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35882 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35887 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35896 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35902 \begin_layout Standard
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35916 \begin_inset Note Note
35919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35920 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35928 \begin_layout Left Header
35929 \begin_inset Argument 1
35932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35952 \begin_inset Note Note
35955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35956 defines the header line as described below
35964 \begin_layout Center Header
35965 \begin_inset Argument 1
35968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35977 \begin_layout Right Header
35978 \begin_inset Argument 1
35981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 \begin_layout Left Footer
36003 \begin_inset Argument 1
36006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36027 \begin_layout Center Footer
36028 \begin_inset Argument 1
36031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36043 \begin_inset Newline newline
36047 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36053 \begin_layout Right Footer
36054 \begin_inset Argument 1
36057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36079 \begin_layout Section
36080 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36083 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36088 \begin_inset Index idx
36091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36092 Document ! Header/Footer line
36098 \begin_inset Index idx
36101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36110 \begin_layout Standard
36111 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36115 \begin_inset space ~
36126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36138 As a second step add in the menu
36140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36141 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36150 Custom Header/Footerlines
36153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36157 This module offers the following 6
36158 \begin_inset space ~
36164 \begin_layout Description
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36170 \begin_inset space ~
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36188 \begin_layout Description
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36202 \begin_inset space ~
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36212 \begin_layout Standard
36213 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36214 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36218 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36219 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36221 \begin_inset space ~
36225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36227 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36231 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36234 \begin_layout Standard
36235 \begin_inset Float figure
36242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 \begin_inset Tabular
36246 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36247 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36250 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36270 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36299 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36310 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36314 The normal text on the page goes here.
36315 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36317 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36318 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36323 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36332 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36361 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36372 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36390 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36408 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36413 name "fig:Page-layout"
36417 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36439 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36448 is set to “Default”.
36449 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36464 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36465 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36466 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36468 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36470 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36473 \begin_layout Standard
36474 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36475 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36481 \begin_inset space ~
36489 \begin_layout Description
36492 thepage prints the current page number
36495 \begin_layout Description
36498 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36501 \begin_layout Description
36504 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36507 \begin_layout Description
36510 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36511 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36518 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36521 because it usually goes in a left header.
36524 \begin_layout Description
36527 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36528 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36530 It is normally used in the right header.
36533 \begin_layout Subsection
36534 Default header/footer
36537 \begin_layout Standard
36538 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36539 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36540 footer has the page number.
36541 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36542 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36543 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36554 \begin_layout Subsection
36558 \begin_layout Standard
36559 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36560 Some pages are different.
36561 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36562 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36563 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36564 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36565 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36569 Header and footer decoration line
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36573 By default, you get a 0.4
36574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36577 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36578 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36590 in the following way:
36593 \begin_layout Standard
36600 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36603 \begin_layout Standard
36604 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36617 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36624 \begin_layout Standard
36625 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36627 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36643 Several header/footer lines
36646 \begin_layout Standard
36647 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36648 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36649 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36651 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36667 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_layout Standard
36684 headheight}{height}
36687 \begin_layout Standard
36692 is a size in standard units (e.
36693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36697 \begin_inset space \space{}
36705 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36706 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36707 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36708 logfile with the menu
36710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36720 \begin_inset space ~
36725 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36730 \begin_inset Index idx
36733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36735 packages ! fancyhdr
36741 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36742 for your header/footer.
36745 \begin_layout Subsection
36749 \begin_layout Standard
36750 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36751 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36752 This example consists of the following definition:
36755 \begin_layout Description
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36766 , empty optional argument
36769 \begin_layout Description
36771 \begin_inset space ~
36774 Header empty, empty optional argument
36777 \begin_layout Description
36779 \begin_inset space ~
36788 in the optional argument
36791 \begin_layout Description
36793 \begin_inset space ~
36802 in the optional argument
36805 \begin_layout Description
36807 \begin_inset space ~
36820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36824 \begin_inset Newline newline
36828 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36835 in the optional argument
36838 \begin_layout Description
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36849 , empty optional argument
36852 \begin_layout Description
36855 headrulewidth set to 2
36856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36862 \begin_layout Standard
36863 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36864 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36870 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36895 pagestyle{headings}
36901 \begin_inset Note Note
36904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36905 switches back to page style with the default headings
36913 \begin_layout Section
36914 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36917 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36922 \begin_inset Index idx
36925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36932 \begin_inset Index idx
36935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36944 \begin_layout Standard
36946 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36947 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36948 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36951 \begin_layout Subsection
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36956 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36962 \begin_inset Index idx
36965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36967 packages ! preview-latex
36972 (on some systems named simply
36977 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36986 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36988 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36996 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36997 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36998 -package are automatically
36999 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37009 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37011 activate the option
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37021 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37031 \begin_inset space ~
37034 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37041 \begin_inset space ~
37054 \begin_inset space ~
37059 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37062 \begin_layout Standard
37063 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37076 \begin_inset space ~
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37086 and when you finish
37090 \begin_layout Standard
37091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37099 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37100 generated by activating the option
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37109 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37117 \begin_layout Subsection
37118 Selected document parts
37121 \begin_layout Standard
37122 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37123 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37124 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37125 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37127 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37133 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37134 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37135 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37138 \begin_layout Standard
37139 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37146 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37158 is explained in section
37160 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37165 \begin_inset space ~
37175 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37176 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37177 the final rotated boxes,
37178 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37179 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37181 Here is the result:
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 \begin_inset Preview
37187 \begin_layout Standard
37192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37196 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37202 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37212 height_special "totalheight"
37217 backgroundcolor "none"
37220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37245 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37251 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37273 \begin_layout Standard
37274 Previewing works also for colors.
37275 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37294 is explained in section
37301 \begin_inset space ~
37314 \begin_layout Standard
37315 \begin_inset Preview
37317 \begin_layout Standard
37321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37340 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37345 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37364 \begin_layout Standard
37365 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37371 \begin_layout Standard
37372 If \SpecialChar LyX
37373 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37374 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37375 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37376 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37377 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37378 the \SpecialChar TeX
37380 If \SpecialChar LyX
37381 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37382 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37384 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37385 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37386 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37389 \begin_layout Subsection
37394 \begin_layout Standard
37395 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37396 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37399 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37401 \begin_inset space ~
37406 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37408 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37410 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37411 's main window, then only this selection
37412 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37413 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37414 the source view window.
37419 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37420 ; but note that if you have
37421 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37423 not just the one which is open at the time.
37426 \begin_layout Section
37427 Advanced Find and Replace
37428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37430 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37435 \begin_inset Index idx
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37445 \begin_inset Index idx
37448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37457 \begin_layout Subsection
37461 \begin_layout Standard
37462 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37463 allows for searching of complex,
37464 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37466 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37467 The key-features are:
37470 \begin_layout Itemize
37471 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37472 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37473 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37477 \begin_layout Itemize
37478 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37479 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37480 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37481 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37484 \begin_layout Itemize
37485 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37486 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37487 outside of mathematics environments
37490 \begin_layout Itemize
37491 Search may be widened to a specific
37496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37503 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37504 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37511 \begin_layout Itemize
37512 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37513 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37521 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37524 \begin_layout Subsection
37528 \begin_layout Standard
37529 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37544 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37547 ) or the toolbar button
37550 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37556 Advanced Find and Replace
37561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37571 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37580 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37583 arg "paragraph-break"
37587 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37588 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37592 arg "paragraph-break"
37595 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37599 searches backwards.
37602 \begin_layout Standard
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37611 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37625 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37629 Searching for mathematics
37632 \begin_layout Standard
37633 Mathematical formulas, such as
37634 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37637 or something more complex like
37638 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37641 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37646 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37647 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37648 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37649 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37659 \begin_layout Standard
37660 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37661 This is done by switching to the
37665 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37670 This way, entering in the
37677 \begin_layout Itemize
37678 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37679 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37682 \begin_layout Itemize
37683 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37684 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37687 \begin_layout Itemize
37688 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37689 of it only within section headings.
37690 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37691 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37695 \begin_layout Itemize
37696 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37697 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37704 \begin_layout Standard
37705 The entries made in the
37709 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37718 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37722 button or alternatively press
37725 arg "paragraph-break"
37732 while the cursor is in the
37735 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37744 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37746 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37750 \begin_layout Itemize
37751 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37752 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37760 with its typewriter version
37761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37775 \begin_layout Itemize
37776 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37782 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37794 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37801 (you may want to enable the
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset space ~
37817 options and disable the
37825 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37833 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37834 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37838 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37841 , or occurrences of
37842 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37846 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37852 \begin_layout Subsection
37856 \begin_layout Standard
37857 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37862 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37864 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37866 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37876 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37882 This is done with the context menu
37884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37885 Insert Regular Expression
37887 while the cursor is in the
37892 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37893 expression matching rules
37897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37898 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37905 \begin_inset space ~
37908 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37909 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37915 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37916 same text in the document.
37917 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37918 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37921 \begin_layout Enumerate
37922 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37927 editor the fraction
37928 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37932 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37935 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37936 fractions with the given denominator.
37939 \begin_layout Enumerate
37940 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37952 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37957 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37958 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37959 Also, by inserting a
37960 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37963 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37964 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37969 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37970 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37973 , and referring back to them through
37974 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37978 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37982 For example, try searching with the regexp
37983 \begin_inset Newline newline
37986 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37989 \begin_inset Newline newline
37992 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37995 \begin_layout Standard
37996 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37999 \begin_layout Standard
38000 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38009 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38010 sub-expressions is absolute.
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38016 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38019 always refers to the first occurrence of
38020 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38023 in all entered regexps.
38031 \begin_layout Section
38033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38035 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38040 \begin_inset Index idx
38043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38054 has a built-in spell checker.
38057 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38064 key or the toolbar button
38067 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38070 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38071 beginning of the currently selected text.
38072 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38073 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38074 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38075 scrolled so that it is visible.
38076 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38077 n, if any could be found.
38078 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38082 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38083 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38086 \begin_layout Standard
38087 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38094 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38095 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38097 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38098 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38101 \begin_inset space ~
38109 arg "dialog-show character"
38112 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38114 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38118 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38119 can be downloaded from here:
38120 \begin_inset Newline newline
38124 \begin_inset Flex URL
38127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38131 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38132 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38133 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38141 \begin_inset Newline newline
38145 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38147 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38148 You should download
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38154 files for each language
38155 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38160 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38163 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38164 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38168 \begin_inset space ~
38171 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38172 's installation subfolder
38180 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38182 \begin_inset Newline newline
38185 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38186 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38187 but in most cases these are
38203 is the language code.
38206 \begin_layout Subsection
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38213 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38214 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38216 \begin_inset space ~
38219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38222 you can set the following things:
38225 \begin_layout Description
38227 \begin_inset space ~
38230 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38231 should use for spell checking.
38232 Depending on your platform,
38242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38243 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38244 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38259 \begin_inset space ~
38262 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38265 \begin_layout Description
38267 \begin_inset space ~
38270 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38271 will always use the given language
38272 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38275 \begin_layout Description
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38280 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38286 \begin_inset space \space{}
38290 This should normally not be needed.
38293 \begin_layout Description
38295 \begin_inset space ~
38299 \begin_inset space ~
38302 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38314 \begin_layout Description
38316 \begin_inset space ~
38319 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38320 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38321 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38322 appear in a context menu.
38323 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38327 \begin_layout Description
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38333 \begin_inset space ~
38337 \begin_inset space ~
38340 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38344 \begin_layout Section
38346 \begin_inset Index idx
38349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38358 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38365 \begin_layout Standard
38367 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38368 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38380 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38390 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38392 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38393 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38394 which are available for many languages.
38397 \begin_layout Standard
38398 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38399 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38403 \begin_layout Subsection
38404 Setting up the thesaurus
38407 \begin_layout Standard
38416 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38420 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38425 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38431 \begin_inset space ~
38439 For instance, the US English files are named:
38442 \begin_layout Itemize
38446 \begin_layout Itemize
38450 \begin_layout Standard
38459 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38460 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38463 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38464 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38465 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38467 \begin_inset space ~
38472 ) to the path where they are installed.
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38478 ies, typical locations are
38484 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38488 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38492 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38495 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38501 LibreOffice-<Version>
38508 On the Mac, the default location is
38510 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38511 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38512 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38513 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38514 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38515 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38523 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38524 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38525 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38529 \begin_layout Standard
38530 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38532 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
38534 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
38537 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
38538 \begin_inset Newline newline
38542 \begin_inset Flex URL
38545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
38549 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38550 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
38551 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
38561 \begin_layout Standard
38562 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38563 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38566 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38567 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38569 \begin_inset space ~
38574 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38576 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38577 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38581 \begin_layout Standard
38582 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38584 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38587 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38593 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38596 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38597 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38605 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38606 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38607 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38609 \begin_inset space ~
38614 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38617 \begin_layout Subsection
38618 Using the thesaurus
38621 \begin_layout Standard
38622 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38624 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38627 or the toolbar button
38630 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38633 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38635 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38637 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38638 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38639 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38648 ), related terms (such as
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38660 ), compounds (such as
38663 \begin_inset space ~
38672 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38681 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38684 \begin_layout Standard
38685 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38686 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38690 \begin_layout Standard
38691 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38692 the dictionary, such as the above
38696 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38701 \begin_inset space \space{}
38704 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38705 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38706 For example, looking up the word form
38710 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38715 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38720 \begin_inset space \space{}
38731 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38732 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38733 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38736 \begin_layout Section
38738 \begin_inset Index idx
38741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38748 \begin_inset Index idx
38751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38752 Document ! Change Tracking
38758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38760 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38767 \begin_layout Standard
38768 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38769 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38770 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38771 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38775 \begin_inset space ~
38778 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38780 \begin_inset space ~
38788 \begin_layout Standard
38789 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38803 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38804 You can change the color in
38806 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38807 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38809 \begin_inset space ~
38813 \begin_inset space ~
38818 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38824 \begin_inset Index idx
38827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38828 Color ! Change tracking
38833 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38834 's status bar when the
38835 cursor is in changed text.
38836 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38839 arg "changes-merge"
38845 \begin_layout Standard
38846 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38848 \begin_inset Index idx
38851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38860 \begin_layout Standard
38861 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38867 \begin_layout Standard
38868 \begin_inset Graphics
38869 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38877 \begin_layout Standard
38878 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38884 \begin_layout Standard
38885 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38888 \begin_layout Standard
38889 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38895 \begin_layout Standard
38896 \begin_inset Tabular
38897 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38898 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38899 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38900 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38910 arg "changes-track"
38918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38926 \begin_inset space ~
38929 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38931 \begin_inset space ~
38940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38949 arg "changes-output"
38957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38965 \begin_inset space ~
38968 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38974 \begin_inset space ~
38978 \begin_inset space ~
38987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39008 Jumps to the next change
39014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39023 arg "change-accept"
39031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39042 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39044 \begin_inset space ~
39053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39062 arg "change-reject"
39070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39081 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39083 \begin_inset space ~
39092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39101 arg "changes-merge"
39109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39117 \begin_inset space ~
39120 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39122 \begin_inset space ~
39131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 arg "all-changes-accept"
39148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39156 \begin_inset space ~
39159 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39161 \begin_inset space ~
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39183 arg "all-changes-reject"
39191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39199 \begin_inset space ~
39202 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39208 \begin_inset space ~
39217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39241 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39275 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39277 \begin_inset space ~
39293 \begin_layout Standard
39294 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39300 \begin_layout Standard
39301 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39323 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39324 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39325 the next change after the current cursor position.
39326 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39327 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39328 step to the next change.
39329 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39332 \begin_layout Standard
39333 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39334 to describe a change.
39337 \begin_layout Standard
39339 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39340 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39346 \begin_inset Index idx
39349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39357 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39366 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39372 \begin_layout Section
39373 Comparison of Documents
39374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39376 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39381 \begin_inset Index idx
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39385 Comparison of documents
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39394 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39397 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39401 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39402 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39404 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39406 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39410 \begin_inset space ~
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39427 \begin_inset space ~
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39435 \begin_inset space ~
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39443 \begin_inset space ~
39447 \begin_inset space ~
39452 enables the change tracking option
39455 \begin_inset space ~
39459 \begin_inset space ~
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39468 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39471 \begin_layout Section
39472 International Support
39473 \begin_inset Index idx
39476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39477 International support
39485 \begin_layout Standard
39486 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39487 with any language you want.
39488 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39489 up \SpecialChar LyX
39491 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39493 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39501 \begin_layout Standard
39502 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39503 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39504 \begin_inset space ~
39508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39510 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39517 \begin_layout Subsection
39519 \begin_inset Index idx
39522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39529 \begin_inset Index idx
39532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39533 Document ! Settings
39539 \begin_inset Index idx
39542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39543 Document ! Language
39551 \begin_layout Standard
39554 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39555 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39558 dialog lets you set
39560 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39565 \begin_layout Standard
39570 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39575 \begin_inset space ~
39580 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39581 For details about the different encoding options see section
39582 \begin_inset space ~
39586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39588 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39595 \begin_layout Subsection
39596 Keyboard mapping configuration
39597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39599 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39606 \begin_layout Standard
39607 If you have for example a U.
39608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39611 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39612 can use an alternate keymap.
39613 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39618 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39619 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39620 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39623 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39630 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39635 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39636 which one you want to use.
39639 \begin_layout Standard
39640 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39641 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39642 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39646 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39647 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39648 one to support the characters you want.
39649 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39656 \begin_layout Chapter
39659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39661 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39668 \begin_layout Standard
39669 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39670 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39671 topic inside the user's guide.
39674 \begin_layout Section
39676 \begin_inset Index idx
39679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39688 \begin_layout Standard
39693 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39696 \begin_layout Subsection
39700 \begin_layout Standard
39701 Creates a new document.
39704 \begin_layout Subsection
39708 \begin_layout Standard
39709 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39710 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39711 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39714 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39720 \begin_layout Subsection
39724 \begin_layout Standard
39728 \begin_layout Subsection
39732 \begin_layout Standard
39733 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39734 Click there on a file to open it.
39737 \begin_layout Subsection
39739 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39745 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39746 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39750 \begin_layout Subsection
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39755 Closes the current document.
39758 \begin_layout Subsection
39762 \begin_layout Standard
39763 Closes all opened documents.
39766 \begin_layout Subsection
39770 \begin_layout Standard
39771 Saves the actual document.
39774 \begin_layout Subsection
39778 \begin_layout Standard
39779 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39780 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39784 \begin_layout Subsection
39786 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39790 \begin_layout Standard
39792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39793 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39799 \begin_layout Subsection
39803 \begin_layout Standard
39804 Saves all opened documents.
39807 \begin_layout Subsection
39811 \begin_layout Standard
39812 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39815 \begin_layout Subsection
39819 \begin_layout Standard
39820 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39821 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39822 It is described in the section
39824 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39829 Additional Features
39834 \begin_layout Subsection
39838 \begin_layout Standard
39839 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39840 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39842 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39843 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39847 \begin_layout Standard
39848 When using the menu entry
39851 \begin_inset space ~
39856 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39860 \begin_inset space ~
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39873 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39874 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39877 \begin_layout Subsection
39879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39881 name "subsec:Export"
39888 \begin_layout Standard
39889 You can export your document to various file formats.
39890 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39892 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39893 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39894 during its configuration.
39897 \begin_layout Standard
39898 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39900 \begin_inset space ~
39904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39906 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39913 \begin_layout Description
39919 \begin_inset space ~
39922 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39927 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39928 \begin_inset Newline newline
39931 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39932 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39936 \begin_layout Description
39937 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39943 \begin_layout Description
39945 \begin_inset space ~
39948 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39954 \begin_layout Description
39955 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39956 's native DVI-format.
39957 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39958 files paths or file names in your document.
39960 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39967 \begin_layout Description
39968 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39969 in files paths or file names
39972 \begin_layout Description
39974 \begin_inset space ~
39981 ) DVI-format using the program
39983 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39986 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39990 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39998 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40006 \begin_layout Description
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40011 (cropped) the same as
40015 but with cropped page margins.
40018 \begin_layout Description
40020 \begin_inset space ~
40023 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40027 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40032 \begin_layout Description
40036 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40044 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40052 \begin_layout Description
40054 \begin_inset space ~
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40061 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40065 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40073 \begin_layout Description
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40086 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40087 source that is compilable with the program
40089 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40093 \begin_layout Description
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40102 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40103 source, additionally all images used in the document
40104 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40108 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40111 \begin_layout Description
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40120 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40121 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40122 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40130 \begin_layout Description
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40143 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40144 source that is compilable with the program
40150 \begin_layout Description
40152 \begin_inset space ~
40156 \begin_inset space ~
40163 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40164 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40170 \begin_layout Description
40172 \begin_inset space ~
40175 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40176 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40182 \begin_inset space \space{}
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40206 represent the version number)
40209 \begin_layout Description
40211 \begin_inset space ~
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40218 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40219 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40220 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40224 \begin_layout Description
40225 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40226 's internal XHTML engine
40229 \begin_layout Description
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40235 \begin_inset space ~
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40246 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40251 For the conversion the program
40260 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40263 \begin_layout Description
40264 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40269 \begin_layout Description
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40274 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40276 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40279 For the conversion the program
40288 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40291 \begin_layout Description
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40296 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40297 For the conversion the program
40306 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40309 \begin_layout Description
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40314 (cropped) the same as
40317 \begin_inset space ~
40322 but with cropped page margins
40325 \begin_layout Description
40329 \begin_inset space ~
40334 PDF-format using the program
40338 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40341 \begin_layout Description
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40362 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40367 \begin_inset space \space{}
40370 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40374 \begin_layout Description
40378 \begin_inset space ~
40383 PDF-format using the program
40385 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40388 , produces PDF-files directly
40391 \begin_layout Description
40395 \begin_inset space ~
40400 PDF-format using the program
40404 , produces PDF-files directly
40407 \begin_layout Description
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40416 PDF-format using the program
40420 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40423 \begin_layout Description
40427 \begin_inset space ~
40432 PDF-format using the program
40437 , produces PDF-files directly
40440 \begin_layout Description
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_layout Description
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40465 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40466 and then exported as text using the program
40471 \begin_layout Description
40476 PostScript format using the program
40484 options see section
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40491 reference "subsec:General-output"
40498 \begin_layout Description
40499 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40500 source and also code in the statistical programming
40514 it is possible to use
40518 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40522 \begin_layout Standard
40523 If one of the menu entries
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40539 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40541 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40549 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40554 \begin_inset Index idx
40557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40558 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40567 \begin_layout Subsection
40571 \begin_layout Standard
40572 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40573 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "sec:Paths"
40587 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40596 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40597 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40598 's preferences as described in section
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40605 reference "subsec:Converters"
40612 \begin_layout Subsection
40613 New and Close Window
40616 \begin_layout Standard
40617 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40621 \begin_layout Subsection
40625 \begin_layout Standard
40626 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40629 \begin_layout Section
40631 \begin_inset Index idx
40634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 \begin_layout Subsection
40647 \begin_layout Standard
40648 Described in section
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40655 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40662 \begin_layout Subsection
40663 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40666 \begin_layout Standard
40667 Described in section
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40674 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40681 \begin_layout Subsection
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40686 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40687 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40690 \begin_layout Subsection
40694 \begin_layout Standard
40695 Selects the whole document.
40698 \begin_layout Subsection
40699 Find & Replace (Quick)
40702 \begin_layout Standard
40703 Described in section
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40710 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40717 \begin_layout Subsection
40718 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40721 \begin_layout Standard
40722 Described in section
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40729 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40736 \begin_layout Subsection
40737 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40740 \begin_layout Standard
40741 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40745 \begin_layout Subsection
40747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40751 \begin_layout Standard
40753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40754 Described in section
40755 \begin_inset space ~
40759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40761 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40770 \begin_layout Subsection
40772 \begin_inset Index idx
40775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40776 Paragraph ! Settings
40784 \begin_layout Standard
40785 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40786 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40790 \begin_layout Standard
40791 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40792 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40799 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40807 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40811 \begin_layout Subsection
40813 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40817 \begin_layout Standard
40819 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40820 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40825 \begin_layout Enumerate
40827 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40828 Customize text properties by means of the
40834 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40837 ; this is described in section
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40844 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40851 \begin_layout Enumerate
40853 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40854 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40856 Apply last settings
40859 \begin_layout Enumerate
40861 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40862 Change the casing of selected text (
40877 \begin_layout Subsection
40879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40883 \begin_layout Standard
40885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40886 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40887 text styles (in the case of this document:
40909 \begin_inset space ~
40913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40915 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40924 \begin_layout Subsection
40925 Table and Rows & Columns
40928 \begin_layout Standard
40929 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40930 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40931 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40934 \begin_layout Subsection
40938 \begin_layout Standard
40939 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40940 It will dissolve this inset.
40941 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40945 \begin_layout Subsection
40949 \begin_layout Standard
40950 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40951 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40954 \begin_layout Subsection
40955 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40958 \begin_layout Standard
40959 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40961 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40968 reference "sec:Nesting"
40973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40975 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40982 \begin_layout Section
40984 \begin_inset Index idx
40987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40996 \begin_layout Standard
40997 At the bottom of the
41001 menu the opened documents are listed.
41004 \begin_layout Subsection
41005 Open/Close all Insets
41008 \begin_layout Standard
41009 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41012 \begin_layout Subsection
41013 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41016 \begin_layout Standard
41017 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41020 \begin_layout Standard
41021 Math macros are described in the
41028 \begin_layout Subsection
41032 \begin_layout Standard
41033 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41040 reference "sec:Navigating"
41045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41047 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41054 \begin_layout Subsection
41058 \begin_layout Standard
41059 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41067 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41074 \begin_layout Subsection
41078 \begin_layout Standard
41079 Opens a window showing console messages.
41080 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41085 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41086 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41087 is processing the document.
41090 \begin_layout Subsection
41092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41094 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41099 \begin_inset Index idx
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41111 \begin_layout Standard
41112 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41114 All toolbars and the
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41122 can be turned on and off.
41127 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41156 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41160 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
41167 \begin_layout Standard
41172 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
41176 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41177 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41178 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41179 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41180 is inside a formula or table respectively.
41183 \begin_layout Standard
41185 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41192 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41199 \begin_layout Subsection
41203 \begin_layout Standard
41207 \begin_inset space ~
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41232 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41233 's main window vertically while
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41261 will split it horizontally.
41262 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41263 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41264 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41265 three or more documents at the same time.
41266 To close a split view, use the menu
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41281 \begin_layout Subsection
41285 \begin_layout Standard
41286 Closes a split view.
41289 \begin_layout Subsection
41293 \begin_layout Standard
41294 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41295 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41296 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41297 's main window fullscreen.
41298 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41299 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41302 \begin_layout Section
41304 \begin_inset Index idx
41307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41316 \begin_layout Subsection
41320 \begin_layout Standard
41321 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41328 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41339 \begin_layout Subsection
41341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41343 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41350 \begin_layout Standard
41351 Here you can insert the following characters:
41354 \begin_layout Description
41359 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41362 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41363 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41364 -packages you have installed.
41365 You can get a complete display by checking
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41374 \begin_inset Newline newline
41378 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41386 Not all characters will be visible in the
41390 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41391 dialog (see section
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41398 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41402 ) can display every character.
41410 \begin_layout Description
41411 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41415 \begin_layout Description
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41424 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41431 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41438 \begin_layout Description
41440 \begin_inset space ~
41443 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41447 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41453 \begin_layout Description
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41458 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41462 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41468 \begin_layout Description
41470 \begin_inset space ~
41473 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41477 \begin_layout Description
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41482 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41486 \begin_layout Description
41488 \begin_inset space ~
41492 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41493 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41499 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41504 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41510 \begin_inset space \space{}
41513 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41514 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41523 To insert a fraction use the command
41528 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41532 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41541 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41548 \begin_layout Description
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41553 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41557 \begin_layout Description
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41563 \begin_inset Index idx
41566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41573 \begin_inset Index idx
41576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41577 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41582 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41583 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41585 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41591 \begin_inset Index idx
41594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41602 \begin_inset Newline newline
41605 More information about this feature can be found in the
41611 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41617 \begin_layout Description
41618 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41620 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41621 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41625 \begin_layout Subsection
41629 \begin_layout Standard
41630 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41633 \begin_layout Description
41634 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41635 \begin_inset script superscript
41637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41646 \begin_layout Description
41647 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41648 \begin_inset script subscript
41650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41659 \begin_layout Description
41661 \begin_inset space ~
41664 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41665 \begin_inset space ~
41669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41671 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41678 \begin_layout Description
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41683 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41690 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41697 \begin_layout Description
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41702 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41709 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41716 \begin_layout Description
41718 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41723 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41729 \begin_inset space \space{}
41732 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41733 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41742 To insert a fraction use the command
41747 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41751 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41760 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41769 \begin_layout Description
41771 \begin_inset space ~
41774 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41775 \begin_inset space ~
41779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41781 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41788 \begin_layout Description
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41793 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41800 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41807 \begin_layout Description
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41812 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41819 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41826 \begin_layout Description
41827 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41834 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41841 \begin_layout Description
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41846 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41853 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41860 \begin_layout Description
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41865 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41872 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41879 \begin_layout Description
41881 \begin_inset space ~
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41888 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41897 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41904 for a usage example.
41907 \begin_layout Description
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41913 \begin_inset space ~
41916 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41923 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41930 \begin_layout Description
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41935 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41936 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41939 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41940 \begin_inset space ~
41944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41946 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41953 \begin_layout Description
41955 \begin_inset space ~
41958 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41959 \begin_inset space ~
41963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41965 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41972 \begin_layout Description
41974 \begin_inset space ~
41977 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41978 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41980 \begin_inset space ~
41984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41986 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41991 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
41995 \begin_layout Description
41997 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42003 \begin_inset space ~
42006 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
42007 to prevent a page break at the given position.
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42015 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
42024 \begin_layout Description
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42029 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42036 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42043 \begin_layout Description
42045 \begin_inset space ~
42049 \begin_inset space ~
42052 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42059 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42066 \begin_layout Subsection
42068 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
42072 \begin_layout Standard
42074 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
42075 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
42076 The submenu allows you to insert
42079 \begin_layout Description
42081 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
42083 \begin_inset space ~
42086 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
42089 \begin_layout Description
42091 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42097 \begin_inset space ~
42100 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
42104 \begin_layout Description
42106 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42111 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
42114 \begin_layout Description
42116 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
42118 \begin_inset space ~
42121 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42124 \begin_layout Description
42126 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42135 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42139 \begin_layout Description
42141 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42146 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42149 \begin_layout Description
42151 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42164 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42167 \begin_layout Description
42169 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42174 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42176 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42177 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42183 \begin_layout Description
42185 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42190 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42193 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42199 \begin_layout Description
42201 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42202 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42203 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42204 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42207 \begin_layout Subsection
42210 List/Contents/References
42213 \begin_layout Standard
42214 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42218 \begin_inset space ~
42239 are described in section
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42246 reference "sec:toc"
42255 is described in section
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42262 reference "sec:Index"
42270 is described in section
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42277 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42283 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42286 is described in section
42287 \begin_inset space ~
42291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42293 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42300 \begin_layout Subsection
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42305 To insert floats, as described in section
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42312 reference "sec:Floats"
42316 and in detail the chapter
42323 \begin_inset space ~
42331 \begin_layout Subsection
42335 \begin_layout Standard
42336 To insert notes, described in section
42337 \begin_inset space ~
42341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42343 reference "sec:Notes"
42350 \begin_layout Subsection
42354 \begin_layout Standard
42355 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42357 Branches are described in section
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42364 reference "sec:Branches"
42371 \begin_layout Subsection
42375 \begin_layout Standard
42376 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42377 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42379 An example is the document class
42380 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42390 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42399 with three custom insets.
42402 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42406 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42412 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42415 \begin_layout Subsection
42417 \begin_inset Index idx
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42429 \begin_layout Standard
42430 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42432 For more information see chapter
42434 External Document Parts
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42443 \begin_layout Subsection
42445 \begin_inset Index idx
42448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42457 \begin_layout Standard
42458 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42459 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42466 \begin_inset space ~
42474 \begin_layout Subsection
42478 \begin_layout Standard
42483 dialog as described in section
42484 \begin_inset space ~
42488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42490 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42497 \begin_layout Subsection
42501 \begin_layout Standard
42506 as described in section
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42513 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42520 \begin_layout Subsection
42524 \begin_layout Standard
42529 as described in section
42530 \begin_inset space ~
42534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42536 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42543 \begin_layout Subsection
42545 \begin_inset Index idx
42548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 \begin_inset Index idx
42558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42559 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42567 \begin_layout Standard
42568 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42569 Floats are described in section
42570 \begin_inset space ~
42574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42576 reference "sec:Floats"
42580 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42583 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42599 \begin_layout Subsection
42603 \begin_layout Standard
42604 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42611 reference "sec:Index"
42618 \begin_layout Subsection
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42623 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42624 \begin_inset space ~
42628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42630 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42637 \begin_layout Subsection
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42642 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42643 Tables are described in section
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42650 reference "sec:Tables"
42654 and in detail in the chapter
42661 \begin_inset space ~
42669 \begin_layout Subsection
42673 \begin_layout Standard
42679 Graphics are described in section
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42686 reference "sec:Graphics"
42693 \begin_layout Subsection
42697 \begin_layout Standard
42698 Inserts a URL as described in section
42699 \begin_inset space ~
42703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42705 reference "subsec:URLs"
42712 \begin_layout Subsection
42716 \begin_layout Standard
42717 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42718 \begin_inset space ~
42722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42724 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42731 \begin_layout Subsection
42735 \begin_layout Standard
42736 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42743 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42750 \begin_layout Subsection
42754 \begin_layout Standard
42755 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42762 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42769 \begin_layout Subsection
42772 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42775 \begin_layout Standard
42776 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42777 environments of the same type.
42779 \begin_inset space ~
42783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42785 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42789 for an explanation.
42792 \begin_layout Subsection
42796 \begin_layout Standard
42797 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42798 title or caption of a float.
42799 Inserts a short title as described in section
42800 \begin_inset space ~
42804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42806 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42813 \begin_layout Subsection
42818 \begin_layout Standard
42819 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42820 Code box as described in section
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42827 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42834 \begin_layout Subsection
42836 \begin_inset Index idx
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42848 \begin_layout Standard
42849 Inserts a program listings box.
42850 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42852 Program Code Listings
42857 \begin_inset space ~
42865 \begin_layout Subsection
42867 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42873 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42874 Inserts the actual date.
42875 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42882 \begin_layout Subsection
42886 \begin_layout Standard
42887 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42888 \begin_inset space ~
42892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42894 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42901 \begin_layout Section
42903 \begin_inset Index idx
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42915 \begin_layout Standard
42916 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42917 \begin_inset space ~
42920 of the current document.
42921 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42924 \begin_layout Subsection
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42930 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42931 to jump, for example, between section
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42936 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42937 \begin_inset space ~
42940 2.5 and use the submenu
42943 \begin_inset space ~
42947 \begin_inset space ~
42954 \begin_inset space ~
42960 \begin_inset space ~
42964 \begin_inset space ~
42970 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42974 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42980 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42983 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42986 \begin_layout Standard
42987 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42996 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42999 \begin_inset space ~
43004 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43007 \begin_layout Subsection
43008 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
43011 \begin_layout Standard
43012 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
43016 \begin_layout Subsection
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43021 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43022 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43023 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43027 \begin_inset space ~
43031 \begin_inset space ~
43039 \begin_layout Subsection
43043 \begin_layout Standard
43044 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43047 The \SpecialChar LyX
43048 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43050 \begin_inset space ~
43058 \begin_inset space ~
43063 manual for a detailed description.
43066 \begin_layout Section
43068 \begin_inset Index idx
43071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43080 \begin_layout Subsection
43084 \begin_layout Standard
43085 Change Tracking is described in section
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43092 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43099 \begin_layout Subsection
43107 \begin_layout Standard
43108 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43109 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43110 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43112 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43113 to the clipboard or update the view.
43114 \begin_inset Newline newline
43117 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43121 \begin_layout Standard
43124 Open Containing Directory
43126 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43127 's temporary folder for the document.
43128 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43129 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43130 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43131 For example some journals require to send the
43135 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43139 \begin_layout Subsection
43140 Start Appendix Here
43143 \begin_layout Standard
43144 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43145 as described in section
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43152 reference "sec:Appendices"
43159 \begin_layout Subsection
43161 \begin_inset space ~
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43168 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43169 default output format for the document (menu
43171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43172 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43173 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43175 \begin_inset space ~
43179 \begin_inset space ~
43185 \begin_inset space ~
43189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43191 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43195 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43199 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43201 \begin_inset space ~
43204 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43209 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43215 \begin_inset space ~
43221 \begin_inset space ~
43225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43227 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43231 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43232 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43240 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43242 \begin_inset space ~
43245 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43255 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43260 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43261 when it is first configured.
43262 The default output format is
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43273 \begin_layout Subsection
43274 View (Other Formats)
43277 \begin_layout Standard
43278 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43279 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43280 actual document with an external program.
43281 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43282 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43283 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43285 All possible formats are listed in section
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43292 reference "subsec:Export"
43297 You should at least see the menu entry
43302 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43304 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43306 \begin_inset space ~
43310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43312 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43317 \begin_inset Index idx
43320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43321 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43330 \begin_layout Standard
43331 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43332 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43334 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43335 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43337 \begin_inset space ~
43340 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43342 \begin_inset space ~
43345 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43349 \begin_inset space ~
43353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43355 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43360 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43361 when it is first configured.
43364 \begin_layout Subsection
43366 \begin_inset space ~
43372 \begin_layout Standard
43373 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43374 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43377 \begin_layout Subsection
43378 Update (Other Formats)
43381 \begin_layout Standard
43382 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43383 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43386 \begin_layout Subsection
43387 View Master Document
43390 \begin_layout Standard
43391 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43412 manual for more information on this topic).
43413 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43414 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43418 \begin_inset space ~
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43427 generates the output of the whole book, while
43431 will just output the chapter alone.
43434 \begin_layout Standard
43435 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43436 in the document settings (menu
43438 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43439 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43440 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43458 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43462 ) or in the preferences (menu
43464 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43465 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43467 \begin_inset space ~
43470 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43475 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43477 \begin_inset space ~
43481 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43493 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43500 \begin_layout Subsection
43501 Update Master Document
43504 \begin_layout Standard
43505 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43526 manual for more information on this topic).
43527 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43528 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43531 \begin_layout Standard
43532 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43533 in the document settings (menu
43535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43537 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43555 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43559 ) or in the preferences (menu
43561 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43562 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43567 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43572 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43574 \begin_inset space ~
43578 \begin_inset space ~
43584 \begin_inset space ~
43588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43590 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43597 \begin_layout Subsection
43599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43601 name "subsec:Compressed"
43608 \begin_layout Standard
43609 Un/compresses the current document.
43610 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43611 compression (see the
43613 Additional Features
43615 manual for details).
43618 \begin_layout Subsection
43622 \begin_layout Standard
43623 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43626 \begin_layout Subsection
43630 \begin_layout Standard
43631 The document settings are described in appendix
43632 \begin_inset space ~
43636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43638 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43645 \begin_layout Section
43647 \begin_inset Index idx
43650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43659 \begin_layout Subsection
43663 \begin_layout Standard
43664 Spell checking is explained in section
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43671 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43678 \begin_layout Subsection
43682 \begin_layout Standard
43683 The thesaurus is described in section
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43690 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43697 \begin_layout Subsection
43699 \begin_inset Index idx
43702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43709 \begin_inset Index idx
43712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43721 \begin_layout Standard
43722 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43723 the highlighted document part.
43726 \begin_layout Subsection
43732 \begin_inset Index idx
43735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43736 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43745 \begin_layout Standard
43746 Generates with the help of the program
43748 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43751 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43752 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43753 This feature is not available on Windows.
43756 \begin_layout Subsection
43762 \begin_inset Index idx
43765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43775 \begin_layout Standard
43776 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43781 \begin_inset space ~
43786 to see the full filename paths.
43789 \begin_layout Subsection
43791 \begin_inset Index idx
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43803 \begin_layout Standard
43804 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43805 files as described in section
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43812 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43819 \begin_layout Subsection
43821 \begin_inset Index idx
43824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43837 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43855 \begin_inset Index idx
43858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43859 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43868 \begin_layout Standard
43869 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43870 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43871 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43872 -packages and programs it needs; see
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43880 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43887 \begin_layout Subsection
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43896 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43903 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43910 \begin_layout Section
43912 \begin_inset Index idx
43915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43924 \begin_layout Standard
43925 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43926 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43928 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43932 \begin_layout Standard
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43941 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43942 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43943 packages and classes found
43944 by \SpecialChar LyX
43946 \begin_inset space ~
43950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43952 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43959 \begin_layout Standard
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43968 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43973 \begin_layout Section
43975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43977 name "sec:Toolbars"
43984 \begin_layout Standard
43985 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43986 \begin_inset space ~
43990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43992 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43999 \begin_layout Standard
44000 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44001 This is described in the
44003 Additional Features
44008 \begin_layout Subsection
44010 \begin_inset Index idx
44013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44022 \begin_layout Standard
44023 \begin_inset Graphics
44024 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44032 \begin_layout Standard
44033 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44039 \begin_layout Standard
44040 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44057 \begin_inset Note Note
44060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44066 manual for more information.
44074 \begin_layout Standard
44075 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44081 \begin_layout Standard
44082 \begin_inset Tabular
44083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44084 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44092 \begin_inset Graphics
44093 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 pull-down box for the environments
44120 \begin_layout Standard
44121 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44127 \begin_layout Standard
44129 \begin_inset Tabular
44130 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44131 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44132 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44133 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44164 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44187 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44233 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44247 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44263 arg "spelling-continuously"
44271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44275 Spellcheck continuously
44281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44334 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44394 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44424 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44426 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44431 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44449 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44463 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44489 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44531 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44545 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44546 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44574 Emphasize text, function of the
44575 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44580 \begin_inset space ~
44583 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44591 arg "dialog-show character"
44602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44623 Set text to noun style, function of the
44624 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44627 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44632 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44634 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44640 arg "dialog-show character"
44651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44657 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44660 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44673 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44689 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44694 arg "textstyle-apply"
44704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44709 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44710 Format text using the current settings in the
44712 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44717 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44752 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44754 \begin_inset space ~
44763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44800 arg "tabular-insert"
44808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44827 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44830 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44843 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44862 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44874 Toggle outline window on/off,
44876 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44892 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44904 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44919 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44944 \begin_layout Subsection
44946 \begin_inset Index idx
44949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44958 \begin_layout Standard
44959 \begin_inset Graphics
44960 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44968 \begin_layout Standard
44969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44975 \begin_layout Standard
44976 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44980 \begin_layout Standard
44981 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44987 \begin_layout Standard
44988 \begin_inset Tabular
44989 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44990 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44991 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44992 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45029 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
45037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45056 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45083 arg "layout-toggle List"
45091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45110 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45137 arg "depth-increment"
45145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45151 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45175 arg "depth-decrement"
45183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45191 \begin_inset space ~
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45213 arg "float-insert figure"
45221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45228 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45244 arg "float-insert table"
45252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45259 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45305 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45319 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45335 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45381 \begin_inset space ~
45390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45399 arg "nomencl-insert"
45407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45415 \begin_inset space ~
45424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45433 arg "footnote-insert"
45441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45463 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45479 \begin_inset space ~
45488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45512 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45514 \begin_inset space ~
45523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45532 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45608 \begin_inset space ~
45617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45626 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45641 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45657 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45672 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45674 \begin_inset space ~
45683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 arg "dialog-show character"
45700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45706 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45708 \begin_inset space ~
45711 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45729 arg "textstyle-apply"
45737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45742 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45743 Format text using the recent settings in the
45746 arg "dialog-show character"
45755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45764 arg "layout-paragraph"
45772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45780 \begin_inset space ~
45789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45798 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45826 \begin_layout Subsection
45827 View/Update Toolbar
45828 \begin_inset Index idx
45831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45832 Toolbar ! View / Update
45840 \begin_layout Standard
45841 \begin_inset Graphics
45842 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45849 \begin_layout Standard
45850 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45856 \begin_layout Standard
45857 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45861 \begin_layout Standard
45862 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45868 \begin_layout Standard
45869 \begin_inset Tabular
45870 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45871 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45872 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45873 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45913 arg "buffer-update"
45921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 arg "master-buffer-view"
45951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45959 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45967 \begin_inset space ~
45976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 arg "master-buffer-update"
45993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46001 \begin_inset space ~
46005 \begin_inset space ~
46014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46023 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46040 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
46042 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
46045 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46046 Synchronize with Output
46052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
46073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46080 View (Other Formats)
46086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46093 arg "update-others"
46097 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
46105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46112 Update (Other Formats)
46125 \begin_layout Standard
46127 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46128 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46134 \begin_layout Subsection
46138 \begin_layout Standard
46139 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46140 \begin_inset space ~
46144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46146 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46150 , the table toolbar
46151 \begin_inset Index idx
46154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46168 manual and the math macro toolbar
46169 \begin_inset Index idx
46172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46185 \begin_layout Chapter
46186 The Document Settings
46187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46189 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46194 \begin_inset Index idx
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46198 Document ! Settings
46206 \begin_layout Standard
46210 \begin_inset space ~
46215 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46216 is called with the menu
46218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46222 You can save your document settings as default with the
46224 Save as Document Defaults
46226 button in any dialog.
46227 This will create a template named
46231 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46232 when you create a new document without
46236 \begin_layout Standard
46241 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46242 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46245 \begin_layout Standard
46246 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46247 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46248 to find the one you are looking for.
46249 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46250 the submenus of the dialog.
46252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46256 \begin_inset space \space{}
46260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46267 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46268 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46269 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46272 \begin_layout Section
46276 \begin_layout Standard
46277 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46279 Document classes are described in section
46280 \begin_inset space ~
46284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46286 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46293 \begin_layout Standard
46297 \begin_inset space ~
46302 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46307 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46308 as a layout for a document class.
46309 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46311 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46320 \begin_layout Standard
46321 Some classes use special class options by default.
46322 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46326 and you can decide to use them or not.
46327 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46328 recommended you leave them untouched.
46333 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46334 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46339 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46341 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46347 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46348 \begin_inset Newline newline
46353 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46356 \begin_inset Newline newline
46359 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46360 distribution, see section
46365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46367 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46380 \begin_layout Standard
46385 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46386 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46387 in the background if the child document
46388 is opened without its master.
46389 This way child documents are always compilable.
46390 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46397 \begin_inset space ~
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46406 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46417 \begin_inset Index idx
46420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46422 packages ! prettyref
46428 \begin_inset Index idx
46431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46433 packages ! refstyle
46438 for cross-references, see section
46439 \begin_inset space ~
46443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46445 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46452 \begin_layout Section
46456 \begin_layout Standard
46457 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46458 Please refer to the section
46461 \begin_inset space ~
46469 \begin_inset space ~
46474 manual for details.
46477 \begin_layout Section
46481 \begin_layout Standard
46482 Modules are explained in section
46483 \begin_inset space ~
46487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46489 reference "subsec:Modules"
46496 \begin_layout Section
46500 \begin_layout Standard
46502 \begin_inset space ~
46506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46508 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46515 \begin_layout Section
46519 \begin_layout Standard
46520 The document font settings are described in section
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46527 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46534 \begin_layout Section
46538 \begin_layout Standard
46539 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46551 \begin_inset space ~
46556 and whether it should be a
46559 \begin_inset space ~
46564 can also be specified here.
46567 \begin_layout Standard
46568 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46569 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46570 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46572 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46575 \begin_layout Standard
46578 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46581 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46582 justifies the text on screen.
46583 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46585 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46589 \begin_layout Standard
46591 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46600 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46605 \begin_layout Section
46609 \begin_layout Standard
46610 This dialog is described in sections
46611 \begin_inset space ~
46615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46617 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46624 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46631 \begin_layout Section
46635 \begin_layout Standard
46636 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46637 \begin_inset space ~
46641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46643 reference "subsec:Margins"
46650 \begin_layout Section
46652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46654 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46659 \begin_inset Index idx
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 Language ! Encoding
46671 \begin_layout Standard
46672 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46673 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46674 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46676 is always encoded in utf8).
46677 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46678 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46679 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46680 -command is not known for
46681 a particular character).
46682 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46686 \begin_layout Standard
46688 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46689 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46690 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46691 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46692 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46693 's default encoding).
46694 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46695 's Unicode support covers the
46696 characters of most scripts.
46697 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46698 using one of the traditional, or
46699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46706 , encodings is necessary.
46709 \begin_layout Standard
46711 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46713 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46716 Traditional (auto-selected)
46722 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46723 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46724 the given language(s).
46726 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46730 \begin_layout Standard
46732 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46733 If you use the option
46738 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46741 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46742 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46745 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46748 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46749 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46750 exactly one encoding.
46751 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46756 \begin_layout Standard
46758 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46759 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46765 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46766 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46770 \begin_layout Standard
46772 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46773 Finally, you can also select
46777 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46778 Note that this encoding is then used for
46783 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46784 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46788 \begin_layout Standard
46790 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46793 Do not load inputenc
46795 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46796 from automatically loading the
46803 \begin_inset Index idx
46806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46808 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46810 packages ! inputenc
46818 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46819 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46820 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46821 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46822 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46824 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46830 Traditional (auto-selected)
46837 \begin_layout Standard
46839 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46841 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46842 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46843 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46844 installation supports Unicode), choose
46845 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46846 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46847 is quite incomplete, so
46848 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46853 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46854 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46855 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46856 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46857 -commands is not used, because all
46858 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46859 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46860 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46861 , two new alternative engines
46862 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46864 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46866 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46869 \begin_inset space ~
46877 \begin_inset space ~
46885 \begin_inset space ~
46891 \begin_inset space ~
46895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46897 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46902 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46906 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46911 \begin_layout Standard
46915 \begin_inset space ~
46920 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46921 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46931 The possible settings are:
46934 \begin_layout Description
46935 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46937 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46938 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46942 \begin_inset space ~
46946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46948 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46955 \begin_layout Description
46956 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46957 format you will use.
46958 In many cases this will be
46963 \begin_inset Index idx
46966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46974 If the newer package
46979 \begin_inset Index idx
46982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46984 packages ! polyglossia
46989 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46990 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46991 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46993 this package will be used instead of
47000 \begin_layout Description
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47013 would be more appropriate.
47016 \begin_layout Description
47017 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47018 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47022 (for German texts), type in
47025 \begin_inset Newline newline
47030 usepackage{ngerman}
47033 \begin_layout Description
47034 None will not use a language package.
47035 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47038 \begin_layout Standard
47039 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47042 \begin_layout Description
47044 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
47046 \begin_inset space ~
47050 \begin_inset space ~
47054 \begin_inset space ~
47061 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47067 \begin_inset Index idx
47070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47072 packages ! inputenc
47078 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47079 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47080 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47086 \begin_layout Description
47087 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47089 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47090 commands, which may result in a big
47091 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47092 -commands are needed.
47094 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
47095 This is the same as the
47108 \begin_layout Description
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset space ~
47117 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47120 \begin_layout Description
47122 \begin_inset space ~
47126 \begin_inset space ~
47129 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47132 \begin_layout Description
47134 \begin_inset space ~
47137 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47140 \begin_layout Description
47142 \begin_inset space ~
47146 \begin_inset space ~
47149 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47150 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47153 \begin_layout Description
47155 \begin_inset space ~
47159 \begin_inset space ~
47162 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47166 \begin_layout Description
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47172 \begin_inset space ~
47175 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47176 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47179 \begin_layout Description
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47185 \begin_inset space ~
47189 \begin_inset space ~
47192 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47193 \begin_inset space ~
47199 \begin_layout Description
47201 \begin_inset space ~
47205 \begin_inset space ~
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47212 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47213 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47216 \begin_layout Description
47218 \begin_inset space ~
47222 \begin_inset space ~
47225 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47226 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47227 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47228 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47229 \begin_inset space ~
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47239 \begin_layout Description
47241 \begin_inset space ~
47245 \begin_inset space ~
47248 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47249 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47250 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47252 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47253 \begin_inset space ~
47257 \begin_inset space ~
47263 \begin_layout Description
47265 \begin_inset space ~
47269 \begin_inset space ~
47272 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47275 \begin_layout Description
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47281 \begin_inset space ~
47284 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47287 \begin_layout Description
47289 \begin_inset space ~
47293 \begin_inset space ~
47296 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47299 \begin_layout Description
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47304 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47307 \begin_layout Description
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47312 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47315 \begin_layout Description
47317 \begin_inset space ~
47321 \begin_inset space ~
47324 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47327 \begin_layout Description
47329 \begin_inset space ~
47333 \begin_inset space ~
47339 \begin_layout Description
47341 \begin_inset space ~
47345 \begin_inset space ~
47348 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47351 \begin_layout Description
47353 \begin_inset space ~
47357 \begin_inset space ~
47363 \begin_layout Description
47365 \begin_inset space ~
47369 \begin_inset space ~
47372 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47378 \begin_inset Index idx
47381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47388 , when using this, set the document language to
47393 \begin_layout Description
47395 \begin_inset space ~
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47402 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47407 , when using this, set the document language to
47410 \begin_inset space ~
47416 \begin_layout Description
47418 \begin_inset space ~
47422 \begin_inset space ~
47425 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47431 \begin_inset Index idx
47434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47436 packages ! japanese
47441 , when using this, set the document language to
47446 \begin_layout Description
47448 \begin_inset space ~
47452 \begin_inset space ~
47455 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47460 , when using this, set the document language to
47465 \begin_layout Description
47467 \begin_inset space ~
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47474 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47479 , when using this, set the document language to
47484 \begin_layout Description
47486 \begin_inset space ~
47489 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47492 \begin_layout Description
47494 \begin_inset space ~
47498 \begin_inset space ~
47502 \begin_inset space ~
47505 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47508 \begin_layout Description
47510 \begin_inset space ~
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47521 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47522 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47523 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47526 \begin_layout Description
47528 \begin_inset space ~
47532 \begin_inset space ~
47538 \begin_layout Description
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47544 \begin_inset space ~
47547 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47548 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47551 \begin_layout Description
47553 \begin_inset space ~
47557 \begin_inset space ~
47560 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47566 \begin_inset Index idx
47569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47576 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47577 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47579 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47580 with the default encoding (
47582 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47588 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47589 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47594 \begin_layout Description
47596 \begin_inset space ~
47604 \begin_inset space ~
47607 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47614 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47617 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47624 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47625 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47627 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47630 \begin_layout Description
47632 \begin_inset space ~
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47639 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47645 \begin_inset Index idx
47648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47656 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47659 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47661 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47662 This used to be more comprehensive than
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47670 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47675 \begin_layout Description
47677 \begin_inset space ~
47680 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47686 \begin_inset Index idx
47689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47691 packages ! inputenc
47698 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47699 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47701 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47702 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47703 with the default encoding (
47705 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47711 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47712 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47717 \begin_layout Description
47719 \begin_inset space ~
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47727 \begin_inset space ~
47730 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47731 \begin_inset space ~
47737 \begin_layout Description
47739 \begin_inset space ~
47743 \begin_inset space ~
47747 \begin_inset space ~
47750 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47751 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47752 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47756 \begin_layout Description
47758 \begin_inset space ~
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47769 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47770 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47773 \begin_layout Section
47775 \begin_inset Index idx
47778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47785 \begin_inset Index idx
47788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47795 \begin_inset Index idx
47798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47799 Color ! Shaded boxes
47805 \begin_inset Index idx
47808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47809 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47817 \begin_layout Standard
47818 Here you can alter the font color for the
47822 (default: black), for
47825 \begin_inset space ~
47830 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47834 (default: white) and for
47837 \begin_inset space ~
47847 sets the color back to the default.
47850 \begin_layout Standard
47851 Clicking any button showing
47859 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47860 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47861 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47862 later more quickly.
47865 \begin_layout Standard
47866 Note, if you change the
47869 \begin_inset space ~
47874 font color and use the option
47877 \begin_inset space ~
47882 in the document settings under
47885 \begin_inset space ~
47890 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47891 \begin_inset space ~
47895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47897 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47904 \begin_layout Standard
47905 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47911 \begin_layout Standard
47915 \begin_inset space ~
47924 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47927 \begin_inset space ~
47930 Code after a forced page break:
47933 \begin_layout Itemize
47934 For the page color:
47935 \begin_inset Newline newline
47942 pagecolor{color name}
47945 \begin_layout Itemize
47946 For the text color:
47947 \begin_inset Newline newline
47957 \begin_layout Standard
47958 You are restricted to one of
47994 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48001 \begin_inset space ~
48007 \begin_inset Newline newline
48010 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
48011 names to refer to them:
48014 \begin_layout Itemize
48020 \begin_inset Newline newline
48025 page_backgroundcolor
48028 \begin_layout Itemize
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48038 \begin_inset Newline newline
48046 \begin_layout Itemize
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \begin_inset Newline newline
48064 \begin_layout Itemize
48068 \begin_inset space ~
48074 \begin_inset Newline newline
48082 \begin_layout Standard
48083 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48086 \begin_inset space ~
48094 \begin_inset space ~
48102 \begin_layout Section
48104 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
48108 \begin_layout Standard
48110 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
48111 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
48112 \begin_inset space ~
48116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48118 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48126 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48127 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48130 \begin_layout Standard
48132 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48133 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48135 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48138 \begin_layout Section
48142 \begin_layout Standard
48143 Here you can adjust the
48147 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48151 as described in section
48152 \begin_inset space ~
48156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48158 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48163 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48167 \begin_layout Standard
48169 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48170 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48172 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
48173 of this package can be used as well.
48174 The most common one are:
48177 \begin_layout Description
48179 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48180 right Line numbers to the right margin
48183 \begin_layout Description
48185 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48186 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48190 \begin_layout Description
48192 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48193 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48196 \begin_layout Description
48198 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48199 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48202 \begin_layout Description
48204 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48205 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48208 \begin_layout Description
48210 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48212 \begin_inset space ~
48215 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48220 \begin_layout Section
48224 \begin_layout Standard
48225 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48231 \begin_inset Index idx
48234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48236 packages ! biblatex
48246 \begin_inset Index idx
48249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48261 \begin_inset Index idx
48264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48272 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48275 Sectioned bibliography
48277 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48283 \begin_inset Index idx
48286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48288 packages ! bibtopic
48298 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48299 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48303 for the generation of the bibliography.
48304 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48311 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48318 \begin_layout Section
48322 \begin_layout Standard
48323 Here you can define the
48327 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48329 \begin_inset space ~
48333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48335 reference "sec:Index"
48342 \begin_layout Section
48346 \begin_layout Standard
48347 The PDF properties are explained in section
48348 \begin_inset space ~
48352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48354 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48361 \begin_layout Section
48365 \begin_layout Standard
48366 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48367 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48373 \begin_inset Index idx
48376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48388 \begin_inset Index idx
48391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48403 \begin_inset Index idx
48406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48418 \begin_inset Index idx
48421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48433 \begin_inset Index idx
48436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48438 packages ! mathdots
48448 \begin_inset Index idx
48451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48453 packages ! mathtools
48463 \begin_inset Index idx
48466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48478 \begin_inset Index idx
48481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48483 packages ! stackrel
48493 \begin_inset Index idx
48496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48498 packages ! stmaryrd
48508 \begin_inset Index idx
48511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48513 packages ! undertilde
48518 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48521 \begin_layout Description
48522 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48523 -errors in formulas,
48524 ensure that you have this enabled.
48527 \begin_layout Description
48528 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48529 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48530 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48534 \begin_layout Description
48535 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48538 \begin_inset space ~
48550 \begin_layout Description
48551 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48554 \begin_inset space ~
48566 \begin_layout Description
48567 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48578 \begin_layout Description
48579 mathtools is used for the math commands
48615 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48622 \begin_layout Description
48623 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48625 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48634 \begin_layout Description
48635 stackrel is used for the math command
48652 \begin_layout Description
48653 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48656 \begin_layout Description
48657 undertilde is used for the math command
48665 Accents for one Character
48674 \begin_layout Section
48676 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48678 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48684 \begin_layout Standard
48686 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48687 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48690 \begin_layout Standard
48692 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48693 The float placement options
48694 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48697 are described in the section
48700 \begin_inset space ~
48704 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48706 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48714 \begin_inset space ~
48722 \begin_layout Section
48726 \begin_layout Standard
48727 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48729 Program Code Listings
48734 \begin_inset space ~
48742 \begin_layout Section
48746 \begin_layout Standard
48747 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48755 set to be used and set the
48760 The itemize environment is described in section
48761 \begin_inset space ~
48765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48767 reference "sec:Itemize"
48774 \begin_layout Standard
48775 You can furthermore specify a
48778 \begin_inset space ~
48783 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48784 command of the desired character.
48785 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48792 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48798 \begin_inset space \space{}
48802 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48812 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48813 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48816 \begin_layout Standard
48817 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48825 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48826 -packages in the preamble (menu
48829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48830 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48833 \begin_inset space ~
48839 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48843 usepackage{textcomp}
48846 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48850 usepackage{amssymb}
48860 \begin_layout Section
48864 \begin_layout Standard
48865 Branches are described in section
48866 \begin_inset space ~
48870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48872 reference "sec:Branches"
48879 \begin_layout Section
48881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48883 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48890 \begin_layout Standard
48891 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48894 \begin_layout Description
48896 \begin_inset space ~
48900 \begin_inset space ~
48903 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48923 View Master Document
48924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48931 Update Master Document
48932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48939 menu or the toolbar.
48940 The default is set in
48942 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48943 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48945 \begin_inset space ~
48948 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48952 \begin_inset space ~
48956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48958 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48965 \begin_layout Description
48967 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48969 \begin_inset space ~
48973 \begin_inset space ~
48977 \begin_inset space ~
48980 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48985 option which is needed with some packages.
48986 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48987 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48990 \begin_layout Description
48992 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48994 \begin_inset space ~
48998 \begin_inset space ~
49001 Options offers settings for the
49009 \begin_layout Itemize
49013 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
49015 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
49017 \begin_inset space ~
49023 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
49025 \begin_inset space ~
49029 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
49035 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
49037 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
49038 settings for the menu
49040 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49044 \begin_inset space ~
49048 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
49051 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
49052 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
49057 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49059 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
49061 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49064 or a detailed description see section
49066 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49071 \begin_inset space ~
49077 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
49081 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
49085 \begin_layout Itemize
49087 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
49090 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
49092 determines whether so-called
49093 \begin_inset Quotes els
49097 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49101 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
49103 \begin_inset Quotes els
49107 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49110 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
49111 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
49112 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
49114 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
49116 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
49117 macros, you can uncheck this.
49118 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49125 \begin_layout Description
49127 \begin_inset space ~
49131 \begin_inset space ~
49134 Options offers settings for the export format
49142 \begin_inset space ~
49147 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49148 \begin_inset space ~
49151 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49155 \begin_inset space ~
49160 settings are described in detail in section
49162 Math Output in XHTML
49167 \begin_inset space ~
49176 \begin_inset space ~
49180 \begin_inset space ~
49185 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49188 \begin_layout Description
49190 \begin_inset space ~
49195 Save transient properties
49197 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49198 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49199 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49203 \begin_layout Itemize
49204 the activation of change tracking
49207 \begin_layout Itemize
49208 the output of tracked changes
49211 \begin_layout Itemize
49212 the recording of the document directory path.
49215 \begin_layout Standard
49216 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49217 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49221 \begin_layout Section
49229 \begin_layout Standard
49230 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49232 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49234 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49236 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49240 \begin_layout Standard
49241 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49242 -syntax is given in section
49243 \begin_inset space ~
49247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49249 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49256 \begin_layout Chapter
49262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49264 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49269 \begin_inset Index idx
49272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49281 \begin_layout Standard
49282 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49284 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49288 It has the following submenus.
49291 \begin_layout Section
49295 \begin_layout Subsection
49299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49300 User Interface File
49301 \begin_inset Index idx
49304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49305 Customization ! of toolbars
49311 \begin_inset Index idx
49314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49315 Customization ! of menus
49323 \begin_layout Standard
49324 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49325 interface (ui) file.
49326 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49334 \begin_layout Description
49339 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49342 \begin_layout Description
49349 the menu entries in popup context menus
49352 \begin_layout Description
49357 specifies the toolbar buttons
49360 \begin_layout Standard
49361 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49362 and edit the entries.
49365 \begin_layout Standard
49366 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49378 entries must be finished with an explicit
49403 and in the case of the
49404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49416 The syntax for the entries is:
49419 \begin_layout Standard
49420 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49449 \begin_layout Standard
49451 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49454 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49455 -functions are listed in the menu
49457 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49459 \begin_inset space ~
49467 \begin_layout Standard
49468 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49474 \begin_layout Standard
49475 For example, assuming you use the menu
49477 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49480 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49484 \begin_layout Standard
49485 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49509 \begin_layout Standard
49511 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49526 to have the sixth bookmark.
49529 \begin_layout Standard
49533 \begin_inset space ~
49538 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49539 's toolbar buttons.
49540 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49541 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49544 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49552 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49556 \begin_layout Standard
49559 Enable tool tips in main work area
49561 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49569 \begin_layout Standard
49574 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49575 should display in the menu
49577 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49579 \begin_inset space ~
49587 \begin_layout Subsection
49591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49595 \begin_layout Standard
49598 Restore window layouts and geometries
49601 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49602 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49606 \begin_layout Standard
49609 Restore cursor positions
49611 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49615 \begin_layout Standard
49618 Load opened files from last session
49620 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49624 \begin_layout Standard
49627 Clear all session information
49629 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49630 sessions (cursor positions, names
49631 of last opened documents, etc.).
49634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49638 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49643 \begin_inset Index idx
49646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49655 \begin_layout Standard
49658 Backup original documents when saving
49660 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49661 it was saved the last time.
49662 It is stored in the
49665 \begin_inset space ~
49671 \begin_inset space ~
49675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49677 reference "sec:Paths"
49681 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49684 \begin_inset space ~
49690 The backup file has the file extension
49691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49705 \begin_layout Standard
49708 Backup documents, every
49710 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49713 \begin_layout Standard
49716 Save documents compressed by default
49718 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49719 \begin_inset space ~
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49725 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49730 This applies to newly created documents only.
49731 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49735 Windows & work area
49738 \begin_layout Standard
49741 Open documents in tabs
49743 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49747 \begin_layout Standard
49752 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49759 \begin_inset space ~
49763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49765 reference "sec:Paths"
49769 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49776 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49777 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49778 of \SpecialChar LyX
49780 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49781 instance is created for each file.
49784 \begin_layout Standard
49787 Single close-tab button
49789 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49799 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49800 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49801 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49805 \begin_layout Standard
49806 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49814 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49815 before the change takes effect.
49823 \begin_layout Standard
49828 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49830 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49832 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49836 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49837 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49838 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49841 \begin_layout Subsection
49843 \begin_inset Index idx
49846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49855 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49862 \begin_layout Standard
49863 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49867 \begin_layout Standard
49868 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49876 This section only deals with the fonts
49880 the \SpecialChar LyX
49882 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49897 \begin_layout Standard
49898 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49915 (depends on the system) as its
49918 \begin_inset space ~
49934 \begin_layout Standard
49935 You can change the font size with the
49942 \begin_layout Standard
49947 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49952 points have the size of 1
49953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49957 \begin_inset space ~
49961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49963 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49968 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49973 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49974 \begin_inset space ~
49978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49980 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49987 \begin_layout Subsection
49989 \begin_inset Index idx
49992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49993 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
50000 \begin_inset Index idx
50003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50012 \begin_layout Standard
50013 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50014 by choosing an item in the
50015 list and selecting the
50022 \begin_layout Standard
50023 By checking the option
50027 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50030 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
50031 \begin_inset space ~
50035 \begin_inset space ~
50040 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50043 \begin_layout Subsection
50045 \begin_inset Index idx
50048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50057 \begin_layout Standard
50058 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50062 \begin_layout Standard
50067 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50068 This feature is described in section
50069 \begin_inset space ~
50073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50075 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50082 \begin_layout Standard
50083 Checking the option
50086 \begin_inset space ~
50090 \begin_inset space ~
50094 \begin_inset space ~
50099 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50102 \begin_layout Section
50104 \begin_inset Index idx
50107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50116 \begin_layout Subsection
50120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50124 \begin_layout Standard
50127 Cursor follows scrollbar
50129 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50133 \begin_layout Standard
50134 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50135 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50136 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50139 \begin_layout Standard
50142 Scroll below end of document
50144 is self-explanatory.
50147 \begin_layout Standard
50148 In \SpecialChar LyX
50149 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50156 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50158 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50159 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50160 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50164 \begin_layout Standard
50166 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
50169 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50171 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
50172 paste operations (i.
50173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50176 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
50177 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
50178 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
50179 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50180 dissolving from insets.
50185 \begin_layout Standard
50188 Sort environments alphabetically
50190 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50193 \begin_layout Standard
50196 Group environments by their category
50198 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50201 \begin_layout Standard
50206 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50215 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50219 \begin_layout Standard
50221 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50224 Search drive for cited files
50226 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50227 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50230 \begin_inset space ~
50234 \begin_inset space ~
50238 \begin_inset space ~
50242 \begin_inset space ~
50245 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50248 context menu on a citation.
50253 field determines the search pattern.
50255 \begin_inset space ~
50259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50261 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50274 \begin_layout Standard
50275 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50280 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50281 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50285 \begin_layout Subsection
50287 \begin_inset Index idx
50290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50297 \begin_inset Index idx
50300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50301 Settings ! Shortcuts
50309 \begin_layout Standard
50314 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50316 Several binding files are available, among them:
50319 \begin_layout Description
50320 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50323 \begin_layout Description
50324 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50336 \begin_layout Description
50337 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50348 \begin_layout Standard
50349 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50354 , and binding files for special languages.
50355 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50360 \begin_inset space \space{}
50364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50372 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50373 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50374 will try to use the appropriate binding
50378 \begin_layout Standard
50379 Some binding files, like
50383 , only have a limited scope.
50384 When looking at the end of the file
50388 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50391 \begin_layout Standard
50395 \begin_inset space ~
50399 \begin_inset space ~
50404 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50405 in the selected key binding file.
50408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50412 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50417 \begin_inset Index idx
50420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50421 Key Bindings ! Editing
50429 \begin_layout Standard
50430 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50431 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50432 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50433 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50436 Show key-bindings containing
50439 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50440 Insert there for example as keyword
50441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50448 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50449 functions that contain
50450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50458 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50459 All \SpecialChar LyX
50460 functions are also listed in the file
50465 that you will find in the
50472 \begin_layout Standard
50473 For example, to add the shortcut
50481 , select the function and press the
50486 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50487 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50490 \begin_layout Standard
50491 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50492 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50497 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50499 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50504 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50507 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50511 \begin_layout Standard
50512 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50515 \begin_layout Standard
50516 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50518 The syntax of the entries is:
50521 \begin_layout Standard
50527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50546 \begin_layout Standard
50547 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50548 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50576 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50577 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50578 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50579 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50581 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50585 , you needed to specify it as
50590 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50593 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50596 \begin_layout Subsection
50598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50600 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50605 \begin_inset Index idx
50608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50615 \begin_inset Index idx
50618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50619 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50627 \begin_layout Standard
50628 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50629 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50630 provides keyboard maps.
50631 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50632 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50635 \begin_inset space ~
50639 \begin_inset space ~
50644 and select the keyboard map file named
50651 \begin_layout Standard
50660 keyboard map and, if you use the
50664 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50667 arg "keymap-primary"
50673 arg "keymap-secondary"
50676 respectively or toggle between them with
50679 arg "keymap-toggle"
50685 \begin_layout Standard
50686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50694 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50703 \begin_layout Standard
50704 You can also specify the mouse
50706 Wheel scrolling speed
50709 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50713 Middle mouse button pasting
50715 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50716 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50719 \begin_layout Standard
50727 \begin_inset space ~
50731 \begin_inset space ~
50736 you can select a key for zooming.
50737 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50740 \begin_layout Subsection
50744 \begin_layout Standard
50745 Input completion is described in section
50746 \begin_inset space ~
50750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50752 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50759 \begin_layout Section
50761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50768 \begin_inset Index idx
50771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50778 \begin_inset Index idx
50781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50790 \begin_layout Standard
50791 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50792 are normally determined during
50794 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50797 \begin_layout Description
50799 \begin_inset space ~
50802 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50803 's working directory.
50804 It is the default when you
50815 \begin_inset space ~
50823 \begin_layout Description
50825 \begin_inset space ~
50828 templates This directory
50829 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50830 contains the templates that are shown
50831 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50832 will be opened when you use the menu
50833 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50838 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50840 \begin_inset space ~
50844 \begin_inset space ~
50852 \begin_layout Description
50854 \begin_inset space ~
50857 files This directory
50858 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50859 will be opened when you use the
50860 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50861 contains the example files that are listed in
50864 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50873 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50875 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50877 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50883 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50885 \begin_inset Newline newline
50889 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50901 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50902 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50912 \begin_layout Description
50914 \begin_inset space ~
50918 \begin_inset Index idx
50921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50927 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50928 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50929 \begin_inset space ~
50933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50935 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50943 will be used to save the backups.
50944 \begin_inset Newline newline
50947 Backup files have the ending
50948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50958 \begin_layout Description
50960 \begin_inset space ~
50963 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50964 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50966 \begin_inset Newline newline
50973 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50979 You can edit this file with the program
50988 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50989 in its preferences under
50992 \begin_inset space ~
50998 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
51003 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51005 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
51006 in your \SpecialChar LyX
51012 and \SpecialChar LyX
51013 need to be running the same time.
51014 \begin_inset Newline newline
51017 The pipe is also used for the
51021 feature, see section
51022 \begin_inset space ~
51026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51028 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51033 \begin_inset Newline newline
51036 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
51037 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
51038 \begin_inset Newline newline
51054 \begin_layout Description
51056 \begin_inset space ~
51059 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51062 \begin_layout Description
51064 \begin_inset space ~
51067 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51068 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51069 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51072 \begin_layout Description
51074 \begin_inset space ~
51077 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51083 You only need to specify it if you are using
51087 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51089 For \SpecialChar LyX
51094 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51098 \begin_layout Description
51100 \begin_inset space ~
51103 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51104 When \SpecialChar LyX
51105 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51106 to find it on the system.
51107 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51109 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51118 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51119 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51122 \begin_layout Description
51124 \begin_inset space ~
51127 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51128 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51129 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51130 code or in the document
51132 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51134 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51135 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51136 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51137 scanned for the input files.
51138 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51139 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51141 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51142 compilation may fail for some documents.
51145 \begin_layout Section
51149 \begin_layout Standard
51150 Here you can insert your
51159 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51161 \begin_inset space ~
51165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51167 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51171 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51174 \begin_layout Section
51176 \begin_inset Index idx
51179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51180 Language ! Settings
51186 \begin_inset Index idx
51189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51190 Settings ! Language
51198 \begin_layout Subsection
51200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51202 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51209 \begin_layout Description
51211 \begin_inset space ~
51215 \begin_inset space ~
51218 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51220 You can find its actual translation status here:
51221 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51223 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51229 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51235 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51236 LaTeX Language Support
51241 \begin_layout Description
51243 \begin_inset space ~
51246 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51247 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51248 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51249 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51266 The most widespread language package is
51271 \begin_inset Index idx
51274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51281 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51283 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51284 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51285 come with the alternative
51291 \begin_inset Index idx
51294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51296 packages ! polyglossia
51301 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51302 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51308 The available selections are described in section
51309 \begin_inset space ~
51313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51315 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51322 \begin_layout Description
51324 \begin_inset space ~
51328 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51329 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51330 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51332 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51336 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51340 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51342 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51346 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51347 that is used to switch to a different language
51348 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51349 to start the package
51353 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51354 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51358 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51359 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51362 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51374 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51382 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51385 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51387 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51409 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51410 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51417 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51418 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51423 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51428 , this setting is ignored.
51433 \begin_layout Description
51435 \begin_inset space ~
51439 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51446 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51447 Use this if the language switch set in
51451 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51455 's alternative command
51459 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51460 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51463 end{otherlanguage*}
51467 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51468 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51469 command toggles the package on and off
51470 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51471 Empty by default, as
51475 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51477 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51482 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51488 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51493 , this setting is ignored.
51498 \begin_layout Description
51500 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51502 \begin_inset space ~
51506 \begin_inset space ~
51509 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51513 \begin_layout Description
51515 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51517 \begin_inset space ~
51521 \begin_inset space ~
51524 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51530 \begin_layout Description
51532 \begin_inset space ~
51536 \begin_inset space ~
51540 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51542 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51545 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51546 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51549 to the document class options
51550 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51551 rather than the language package options.
51552 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51556 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51557 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51559 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51560 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51562 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51567 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51568 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51577 \begin_layout Description
51579 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51581 \begin_inset space ~
51585 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51587 \begin_inset space ~
51591 \begin_inset space ~
51595 \begin_inset space ~
51601 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51603 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51606 this option is set,
51607 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51608 the language switch defined in
51611 \begin_inset space ~
51616 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51617 to the document language.
51618 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51619 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51622 \begin_inset space ~
51627 or if a package resets the document language.
51628 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51629 usually should be the document language).
51630 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51631 documents start with the chosen document language.
51632 When this option is not set, the
51635 \begin_inset space ~
51640 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51642 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51645 \begin_inset space ~
51655 \begin_layout Description
51657 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51659 \begin_inset space ~
51663 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51665 \begin_inset space ~
51669 \begin_inset space ~
51673 \begin_inset space ~
51679 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51683 \begin_inset space ~
51687 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51688 Set document language explicitly
51694 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51696 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51702 \begin_inset space ~
51708 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51710 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51714 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51716 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51719 the end of the document.
51720 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51725 \paragraph_spacing single
51727 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51733 \begin_layout Description
51735 \begin_inset space ~
51739 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51741 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51745 \begin_inset space ~
51749 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51751 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51753 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51757 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51760 in a language different
51761 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51763 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51766 the document language will be
51767 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51768 marked (by default with a blue
51771 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51773 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51777 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51781 \begin_layout Description
51783 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51785 \begin_inset space ~
51789 \begin_inset space ~
51793 \begin_inset space ~
51796 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51797 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51798 switched via the operating system.
51799 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51804 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51805 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51810 \begin_layout Description
51812 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51814 \begin_inset space ~
51818 \begin_inset space ~
51821 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51822 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51827 \begin_layout Description
51829 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51831 \begin_inset space ~
51835 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51837 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51841 \begin_inset space ~
51845 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51846 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51847 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51849 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51853 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51855 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51856 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51858 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51859 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51860 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51862 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51867 \begin_layout Standard
51872 means that the cursor
51873 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51874 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51875 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51880 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51881 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51885 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51887 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51888 specific case always means: move
51892 in text (even if this means:
51898 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51899 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51900 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51901 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51902 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51914 \begin_layout Standard
51916 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51921 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51922 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51923 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51927 ) when coming from the left.
51928 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51930 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51931 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51939 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51943 \begin_layout Description
51945 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51947 \begin_inset space ~
51951 \begin_inset space ~
51954 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51955 separator alignment).
51956 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51961 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51962 (static) custom character here.
51965 \begin_layout Description
51967 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51969 \begin_inset space ~
51973 \begin_inset space ~
51976 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51982 \begin_layout Subsection
51986 \begin_layout Standard
51987 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51988 \begin_inset space ~
51992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51994 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
52001 \begin_layout Section
52005 \begin_layout Subsection
52007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52009 name "subsec:General-output"
52016 \begin_layout Description
52018 \begin_inset space ~
52021 search Commands that will be used for the menu
52023 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52025 \begin_inset space ~
52031 For a detailed description see section
52033 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52038 \begin_inset space ~
52046 \begin_layout Description
52048 \begin_inset space ~
52051 Options Options for the program
52055 that is used for the export format
52060 \begin_inset space ~
52064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52066 reference "subsec:Export"
52071 Possible options are listed in the
52076 \begin_inset Newline newline
52080 \begin_inset Flex URL
52083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52085 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52095 \begin_layout Description
52097 \begin_inset space ~
52101 \begin_inset space ~
52104 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
52107 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52108 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52110 \begin_inset space ~
52116 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52119 \begin_layout Description
52121 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52123 \begin_inset space ~
52127 \begin_inset Index idx
52130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52137 \begin_inset Index idx
52140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52141 Settings ! Date format
52146 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52147 \begin_inset Newline newline
52151 \begin_inset Flex URL
52154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52156 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52162 \begin_inset Newline newline
52165 For example the format
52166 \begin_inset Newline newline
52170 \begin_inset Newline newline
52173 prints the date as day/month/year.
52178 \begin_layout Description
52180 \begin_inset space ~
52184 \begin_inset space ~
52187 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52188 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52191 \begin_layout Subsection
52197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52199 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52204 \begin_inset Index idx
52207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52208 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52217 \begin_layout Description
52219 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52221 \begin_inset space ~
52229 \begin_inset space ~
52233 \begin_inset space ~
52236 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52241 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52262 are used for Cyrillic.
52263 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52276 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52278 sets up in the background.
52279 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52284 \begin_layout Description
52286 \begin_inset space ~
52290 \begin_inset space ~
52294 \begin_inset space ~
52298 \begin_inset space ~
52301 options They only have an effect when the program
52305 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52308 \begin_layout Standard
52309 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52310 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52311 manuals of the applications.
52314 \begin_layout Description
52316 \begin_inset space ~
52319 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52320 \begin_inset space ~
52324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52326 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52333 \begin_layout Description
52335 \begin_inset space ~
52338 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52339 \begin_inset space ~
52343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52345 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52352 \begin_layout Description
52354 \begin_inset space ~
52357 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52358 \begin_inset space ~
52362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52364 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52371 \begin_layout Description
52377 \begin_inset space ~
52380 command Command for the program
52382 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52385 that is described in the section
52387 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52392 Additional Features
52397 \begin_layout Standard
52398 There are additionally the following options:
52401 \begin_layout Description
52403 \begin_inset space ~
52407 \begin_inset space ~
52411 \begin_inset space ~
52415 \begin_inset space ~
52420 \begin_inset space ~
52423 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52441 to separate folders.
52442 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52444 \begin_inset Index idx
52447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52454 \begin_inset Index idx
52457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52466 \begin_layout Description
52468 \begin_inset space ~
52472 \begin_inset space ~
52476 \begin_inset space ~
52480 \begin_inset space ~
52484 \begin_inset space ~
52488 \begin_inset space ~
52491 changes Removes all manually set
52497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52498 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52500 \begin_inset space ~
52505 dialog when changing the document class.
52508 \begin_layout Section
52510 \begin_inset space ~
52514 \begin_inset Index idx
52517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52526 \begin_layout Subsection
52528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52530 name "subsec:Converters"
52535 \begin_inset Index idx
52538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52547 \begin_layout Standard
52548 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52549 from one format to another.
52550 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52551 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52558 \begin_inset space ~
52563 field and press the
52568 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52572 \begin_inset space ~
52577 drop-down list, modify the
52581 field and press the
52588 \begin_layout Standard
52591 Converter File Cache
52597 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52599 Maximum Age (in days
52602 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52603 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52606 \begin_layout Standard
52607 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52608 definition, is described in the section
52619 \begin_layout Subsection
52621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52623 name "sec:File-Formats"
52628 \begin_inset Index idx
52631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52638 \begin_inset Index idx
52641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52650 \begin_layout Standard
52651 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52661 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52664 \begin_layout Standard
52665 You can also define the
52667 Default output format
52669 that is used when you use
52671 View, Update, View Master Document
52675 Update Master Document
52681 menu or the toolbar.
52684 \begin_layout Standard
52685 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52696 \begin_layout Standard
52697 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52699 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52700 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52701 This is done by specifying a
52706 More about this is described in the section
52717 \begin_layout Chapter
52718 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52720 \begin_inset Index idx
52723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52732 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52739 \begin_layout Standard
52741 \begin_inset space ~
52745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52747 reference "tab:Units"
52751 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52752 and used in this documentation.
52755 \begin_layout Standard
52756 \begin_inset Float table
52763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52764 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52782 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52790 \begin_inset Tabular
52791 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52792 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52793 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52794 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52948 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53219 scaled point (65536
53220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53287 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53411 % of original image width
53416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53500 \begin_layout Standard
53501 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53504 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53511 \begin_layout Bibliography
53512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53513 LatexCommand bibitem
53520 The \SpecialChar LyX
53522 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53525 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53531 \begin_inset Newline newline
53535 \begin_inset Flex URL
53538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53540 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53548 \begin_layout Bibliography
53549 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53550 LatexCommand bibitem
53551 key "latexcompanion"
53556 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53558 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53559 Companion Second Edition.
53562 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53565 \begin_layout Bibliography
53566 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53567 LatexCommand bibitem
53573 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53576 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53580 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53583 \begin_layout Bibliography
53584 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53585 LatexCommand bibitem
53594 : A Document Preparation System.
53597 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53600 \begin_layout Bibliography
53601 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53602 LatexCommand bibitem
53612 The \SpecialChar TeX
53616 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53619 \begin_layout Bibliography
53620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53621 LatexCommand bibitem
53627 The \SpecialChar TeX
53629 \begin_inset Newline newline
53633 \begin_inset Flex URL
53636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53638 https://ctan.org/topic
53646 \begin_layout Bibliography
53647 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53648 LatexCommand bibitem
53654 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53656 \begin_inset Newline newline
53660 \begin_inset Flex URL
53663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53665 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53673 \begin_layout Bibliography
53674 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53675 LatexCommand bibitem
53682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53684 name "Documentation"
53685 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53692 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53696 \begin_inset Newline newline
53700 \begin_inset Flex URL
53703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53705 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53713 \begin_layout Bibliography
53714 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53715 LatexCommand bibitem
53722 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53724 name "Documentation"
53725 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53730 how to use the program
53732 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53736 \begin_inset Newline newline
53740 \begin_inset Flex URL
53743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53745 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53753 \begin_layout Bibliography
53754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53755 LatexCommand bibitem
53762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53764 name "Documentation"
53765 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53770 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53776 \begin_inset Index idx
53779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53781 packages ! biblatex
53787 \begin_inset Newline newline
53791 \begin_inset Flex URL
53794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53796 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53804 \begin_layout Bibliography
53805 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53806 LatexCommand bibitem
53813 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53815 name "Documentation"
53816 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53821 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53827 \begin_inset Index idx
53830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53838 \begin_inset Newline newline
53842 \begin_inset Flex URL
53845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53847 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53855 \begin_layout Bibliography
53856 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53857 LatexCommand bibitem
53864 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53866 name "Documentation"
53867 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53877 \begin_inset Newline newline
53881 \begin_inset Flex URL
53884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53886 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53894 \begin_layout Bibliography
53895 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53896 LatexCommand bibitem
53897 key "makeindex-man"
53903 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53906 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53916 \begin_inset Newline newline
53920 \begin_inset Flex URL
53923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53925 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53933 \begin_layout Bibliography
53934 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53935 LatexCommand bibitem
53942 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53944 name "Documentation"
53945 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53955 \begin_inset Newline newline
53959 \begin_inset Flex URL
53962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53964 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53972 \begin_layout Bibliography
53973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53974 LatexCommand bibitem
53981 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53983 name "Documentation"
53984 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53989 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53991 \begin_inset Newline newline
53995 \begin_inset Flex URL
53998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54000 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54008 \begin_layout Bibliography
54009 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54010 LatexCommand bibitem
54017 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54019 name "Documentation"
54020 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54025 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54031 \begin_inset Index idx
54034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54042 \begin_inset Newline newline
54046 \begin_inset Flex URL
54049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54051 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54059 \begin_layout Bibliography
54060 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54061 LatexCommand bibitem
54068 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54070 name "Documentation"
54071 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54076 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54082 \begin_inset Index idx
54085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54087 packages ! enumitem
54093 \begin_inset Newline newline
54097 \begin_inset Flex URL
54100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54102 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54110 \begin_layout Bibliography
54111 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54112 LatexCommand bibitem
54119 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54121 name "Documentation"
54122 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54127 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54133 \begin_inset Index idx
54136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54138 packages ! fancyhdr
54144 \begin_inset Newline newline
54148 \begin_inset Flex URL
54151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54153 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54161 \begin_layout Bibliography
54162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54163 LatexCommand bibitem
54170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54172 name "Documentation"
54173 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54178 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54184 \begin_inset Index idx
54187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54189 packages ! hyperref
54195 \begin_inset Newline newline
54199 \begin_inset Flex URL
54202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54204 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54212 \begin_layout Bibliography
54213 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54214 LatexCommand bibitem
54221 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54223 name "Documentation"
54224 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54229 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54235 \begin_inset Index idx
54238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54240 packages ! microtype
54246 \begin_inset Newline newline
54250 \begin_inset Flex URL
54253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54255 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54263 \begin_layout Bibliography
54264 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54265 LatexCommand bibitem
54272 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54274 name "Documentation"
54275 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54280 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54286 \begin_inset Index idx
54289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54297 \begin_inset Newline newline
54301 \begin_inset Flex URL
54304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54306 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54314 \begin_layout Bibliography
54315 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54316 LatexCommand bibitem
54323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54325 name "Documentation"
54326 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54331 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54337 \begin_inset Index idx
54340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54342 packages ! prettyref
54348 \begin_inset Newline newline
54352 \begin_inset Flex URL
54355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54357 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54365 \begin_layout Bibliography
54366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54367 LatexCommand bibitem
54374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54376 name "Documentation"
54377 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54382 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54388 \begin_inset Index idx
54391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54393 packages ! refstyle
54399 \begin_inset Newline newline
54403 \begin_inset Flex URL
54406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54408 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54416 \begin_layout Bibliography
54417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54418 LatexCommand bibitem
54425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54428 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54433 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54435 \begin_inset Newline newline
54439 \begin_inset Flex URL
54442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54444 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54452 \begin_layout Bibliography
54453 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54454 LatexCommand bibitem
54461 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54464 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54469 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54471 \begin_inset Newline newline
54475 \begin_inset Flex URL
54478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54480 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54488 \begin_layout Bibliography
54489 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54490 LatexCommand bibitem
54497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54500 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54505 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54506 for Cyrillic languages:
54507 \begin_inset Newline newline
54511 \begin_inset Flex URL
54514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54516 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54524 \begin_layout Bibliography
54525 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54526 LatexCommand bibitem
54533 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54536 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54541 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54543 \begin_inset Newline newline
54547 \begin_inset Flex URL
54550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54552 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54560 \begin_layout Bibliography
54561 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54562 LatexCommand bibitem
54569 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54572 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54577 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54579 \begin_inset Newline newline
54583 \begin_inset Flex URL
54586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54588 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54596 \begin_layout Bibliography
54597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54598 LatexCommand bibitem
54605 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54608 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54613 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54615 \begin_inset Newline newline
54619 \begin_inset Flex URL
54622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54624 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54632 \begin_layout Standard
54633 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54667 \begin_inset Note Note
54670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54677 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54678 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54679 bibliography is the second one:
54687 \begin_layout Standard
54688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54689 LatexCommand bibtex
54690 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54691 options "biblio/alphadin"
54698 \begin_layout Standard
54699 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54703 \begin_layout Standard
54707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54713 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54722 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54730 \begin_inset Note Note
54733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54734 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54735 \begin_inset space ~
54739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54741 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54753 \begin_layout Standard
54754 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54755 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54761 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54762 LatexCommand printindex